• Author / Uploaded
• Carlos Roberto Honorato Zuñiga

Citation preview

LP-1010 Black-and-White Raster Plotter Maintenance Manual U00090001101

Seiko I Infotech Inc.

U00090001100 U00090001101

April 2005 January 2007

©Seiko I Infotech 2005, 2007 Reprinting of this manual without permission is prohibited. The content of this manual may be changed without notice. is a registered trademark of Seiko Instruments Inc. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox, Inc. HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard (U.S.A.)

Foreword This manual contains the information necessary to conduct the primary maintenance for the black-and-white raster plotter LP-1010 (hereinafter called the device) at the site. The manual is intended for the maintenance personnel who have mastered assembly, disassembly, and adjustment of the device. The responsible personnel will perform maintenance operations using necessary tools and measuring instruments. Before starting the intended maintenance operations, be sure to completely read "Safety Precautions" and "Operational Precautions" described from the next page so that you can inspect and maintain the deveice safely and correctly.

i

Safety Precautions The following symbols are used in this manual to ensure the proper use of the plotter and to prevent the plotter from being damaged. Follow the instructions marked with these symbols.

WARNING

Serious personal injury or death: Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this symbol could result in serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Minor personal injury or product and/or peripheral damage: Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this symbol could result in minor personal injury or product and/or peripheral damage.

Example of symbols: This symbol ( ) denotes items that require special care while executing a certain procedure or operation.

This symbol ( ) denotes items that are forbidden. The indication at left means that "Contact is prohibited."

This symbol ( injury.

) denotes items you should follow to prevent accidents or

ii

Warning DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH VOLTAGE" label (transfer/ separator) attached as it may result in electric shock. DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH TEMPERATURE" label attached as it may result in severe burns. DO NOT disassemble or remodel the plotter. DO NOT repair the plotter by yourself. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock or other accidents. DO NOT throw the toner cartridge or waste toner bottle into fire or place them near heat as they could explode or catch fire leading to serious accidents and/or bodily injury. Before replacing a maintenance component, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the power cable from the power outlet. Failure to observe the instructions may result in electric shock. DO NOT disconnect or connect the power cable with wet hands. Doing so may lead to electric shock.

Caution If the toner accidentally gets into the eye during the maintenance, wash it off with clean running water instead of rubbing it and consult a doctor immediately. If the toner gets on the skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with soapy water. Pay attention not to get injured by a cutter or screwdriver during the maintenance and damage the device.

In order to ensure the safe operation of the device heed all of the cautions and warnings contained throughout this manual.

iii

Warning labels Warning labels are affixed to this device at the locations shown in the following figure. You should understand what these warning labels say and perform the inspection and maintenance work.

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

4 "Gas spring expiration date" label

2a "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label

1 "Caution: high temperature" label

2b "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label

iv

1 "Caution: HIGH TEMPERATURE" label (affixed to the inside of the fixation door) This label cautions you not touch this area due to high temperature. The fixation device will become hot. Take care to avoid contact when dealing with paper jams.

2 "Caution when dealing with paper jams" label This label indicates the direction that jammed paper should be pulled out when paper is jammed in the fixation device. Follow the directions on the label to remove the paper.

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label This label cautions against contact due to high voltage application. As it is dangerous, never contact this area.

4 "Gas spring expiration date" label This caution label indicates the date when the gas spring is consumed, and the user must replace the gas spring before the indicated date expires.

v

Precaution on Maintenance Before and during the inspection and maintenance of the device, observe the following precautions. 1 Before the intended inspection and maintenance, hear the condition and/or trouble of this device from the user. Although the machine is sound, the user may use the toner/paper that is not supplied by Seiko I Infotech (SIIT) or the data may be error. For this reason, certainly verify the current situation and determine the cause of trouble, if any. 2 When disassembling the device to, for example, replace a component, you should examine and know the machine configuration completely so that you can smoothly reassemble the machine. 3 Ensure sufficient maintenance space. 4 Pay attentimon not to spill the fresh/waste toner. Before the intended inspection and maintenance, spread a sheet or cloth on the floor to protect the floor mat from soiling. 5 Do not keep the top cover (clamshell) opened for a long period of time. Otherwise, the exposure drum will be deteriorated due to photo-fatigue. Cover the drum with a black bag when the clamshell is removed. 6 Do not touch the photodrum surface with bare hands. Otherwise, the drum will be degraded. If you touch the surface, completely wipe it with a clean cloth such as Bencot. The poor image quality brought from the bare-hand contact can be removed by outputting about fifteen sheets of paper. 7 Do not open the top cover with the photodrum removed. Otherwise, the cleaner will topple and the waste toner is spilled to soil the machine interior. 8 Do not get any ferromagnetic material such as bolt and washer close to the developing sleeve. If the part is attracted by the magnet roll, be sure to remove it to prevent the drum from being damaged. 9 Do not run the developing sleeve in the reverse direction.

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Foreword

i

Safety Precautions

ii

Warning labels

iv

Precaution on Maintenance

vi

Maintenance Work Procedure

1-1

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

1-1

1.2 Necessary Tools

1-3

1.3 External View and Nomenclatures

1-3

1.4 Maintenance Space

1-7

1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware 1.5.1 Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card 1.5.2 Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card 1.5.3 Other Version Upgrade Operations 1.5.4 Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade 1.5.5 Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card 1.5.6 Explanation of Maintenance CF Card 1.5.7 Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center 1.5.8 Version Upgrade by Web Browser 1.5.9 Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol

1-9 1-9 1-11 1-11 1-13 1-17 1-19 1-19 1-21 1-23

Engine Maintenance Mode

2-1

2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation 2.1.1 Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode 2.1.2 Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel

2-2 2-2 2-3

2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu

2-4

CONTENTS-1

2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter Oper2.3 Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus 2-6 2.3.1 Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance) 2-6 2.3.2 Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information) 2-10 2.3.3 Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information) 2-13 2.3.4 Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log) 2-16 2.3.5 Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log) 2-20 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9 2.3.10 2.3.11 2.3.12 2.3.13 2.3.14

Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor) Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor) Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator) Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test) Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment) Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM) Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER" (User-defined engine parameter) 2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width) 2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG" (Process Cartridge Consumption Log) 2.4 Message

Chapter 3

CONTENTS-2

Maintenance Person Mode

2-23 2-26 2-28 2-32 2-37 2-42 2-51 2-59 2-62 2-66 2-70 2-7

3-1

3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode

3-1

3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus

3-3

3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web

3-5

3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions

3-5

Chapter 4

Regular Inspection 4.1 Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

4-1 4-2

5-1

5.1 Type of Error Messages

5-1

5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error

5-2

5.3 Operator Notice Warning

5-3

5.4 Warning 5.4.1 Communication Error 5.4.2 PDL Warning 5.4.3 Engine Warning 5.4.4 Main Warning

5-5 5-5 5-6 5-8 5-8

5.5 Service Call Error 5.5.1 Engine Error 5.5.2 System Error 5.5.3 Controller Error

5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9

5.6 Error Log 5.6.1 Classification of Error/Warning 5.6.2 Format of Message 5.6.3 Log Registration Format 5.6.4 Error Log Print Item 5.6.5 Type of Error Log

5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-14

5.7 Error Log Classification List

5-16

5.8 Job Log 5.8.1 Job Log Print Item

5-17 5-17

CONTENTS-3

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)

5-19

5.10 Serial Number Unset

5-20

Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

6-1

6.1 How to Read This Manual 6.1.1 Overview of Engine Troubleshooting 6.1.2 Terminology

6-1 6-1 6-3

6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting 6.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description 6.2.2 Paper Jam Error Codes and Description

6-5 6-5 6-6

6.3 Leve-2 Troubleshooting 6.3.1 "Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting 6.3.2 "Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting 6.3.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

6-7 6-7 6-15 6-27

Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

7-1

7.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method 7.1.1 Type of Engine Test Patterns

7-1 7-2

7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure 7.2.1 Plotting Specification and Measuring Method 7.2.2 Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure

7-4 7-4 7-6

7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure

7-7

Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly) 8.1 How to Read This Manual 8.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly 8.1.2 Covers

CONTENTS-4

8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2

8.2 Replacing the Parts 8.2.1 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board) 8.2.2 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board) 8.2.3 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board) 8.2.4 Replacing the Controller Fan 8.2.5 Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor 8.2.6 Replacing the Cutter Unit 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.11 8.2.12 8.2.13 8.2.14 8.2.15 8.2.16 8.2.17 8.2.18 8.2.19 8.2.20 8.2.21 8.2.22 8.2.23 8.2.24 8.2.25 8.2.26 8.2.27 8.2.28 8.2.29 8.2.30 8.2.31 8.2.32 8.2.33 8.2.34

8-3 8-3 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-13 8-13

Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit Replacing the Power Switch Replacing the Filter Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor. Replacing the Fixation Unit Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY Replacing the Main Motor Replacing the Transport (suction). Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan) Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation Replacing the Fan on Fuser Replacing the Charger Fan Replacing the Process Unit Replacing the LED Head Replacing the Transfer Separator Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED) Replacing the Developer Replacing the Developer DV Spacer Replacing the Developer Blade Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch) Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch) Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor Replacing the Control Panel Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02) Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit (PS11, PS12, PS21, PS22, PS31, and PS32) 8.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring 8.2.36 Replacing the heat roller

8-19 8-20 8-21 8-23 8-23 8-25 3-30 3-33 3-34 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-42 3-43 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-52 3-53 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-62 3-63 8-64

CONTENTS-5

8.2.37 8.2.38 8.2.39 8.2.40 8.2.41

Chapter 9

CONTENTS-6

Replacing the backup roller Cleaning Primary Wire Exchanging Primary Wire Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum

Adjustment

8-67 8-69 8-72 8-76 8-80

9-1

9.1 Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit 9.1.1 Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current 9.1.2 Developer AC Bias 9.1.3 Developer DC Bias 9.1.4 Transfer Load Current 9.1.5 Separator AC Bias

9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6

9.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit

9-7

9.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head

9-8

9.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items 9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure 9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack 9.4.3 Adjusting the Cut Squareness 9.4.4 Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy 9.4.5 Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy 9.4.6 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration 9.4.7 Adjusting the Center Registration

9-9 9-10 9-11 9-14 9-15 9-17 9-19 9-21

9.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space

9-24

9.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint

9-25

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10-1

10.1 Features

10-2

10.2 Engine Specifications

10-3

10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

10-4

10.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation) 10.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 10.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration 10.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram 10.4.4 Outline of Operations

10-5 10-5 10-6 10-8 10-9

10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation 10.5.1 Primary Charging 10.5.2 Photosensitive Drum 10.5.3 Exposure 10.5.4 Development 10.5.5 Transfer 10.5.6 Separation 10.5.7 Cleaning 10.5.8 Charge Elimination 10.5.9 Fusing

10-11 10-11 10-12 10-13 10-14 10-15 10-16 10-16 10-17 10-17

10.6 Operation of Drive and Feed Systems 10.6.1 Drive System 10.6.2 Paper feed system

10-19 10-19 10-19

10.7 Control System 10.7.1 Process Control 10.7.2 Paper Feed Control

10-21 10-21 10-21

10.8 Controller 10.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications 10.8.2 Hardware Configuration 10.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart

10-22 10-22 10-23 10-24

CONTENTS-7

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication

A-1

A.1 Setting the DIP Switches A.1.1 Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4) A.1.2 Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board A.1.3 Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board

A-1 A-1 A-2 A-2

A.2 LED Indication A.2.1 LED indication on MEC board

A-3 A-3

A.3 Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board

A-6

Appendix B RFU Board Setup B.1 Setup of DIP Switch B.1.1 DIP Switch on the RFU Board

Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board Setup C.1 Setup of DIP Switches C.1.1 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7) C.1.2 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2) C.1.3 DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board C.1.4 DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board

B-1 B-1 B-1

C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-2 C-2

Appendix D Menu Structure

D-1

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-1

CONTENTS-8

Tables Table 1-1 Table 1-2 Table 1-3 Table 1-4 Table 1-5 Table 1-6 Table 1-7

Necessary Tool List Other Version Upgrade List CF Card Version Upgrade Error List CF Card Version Upgrade Error List Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List

1-2 1-11 1-14 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-16

Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4

Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes Engine Control Parameter List

2-4 2-19 2-22 2-53

Table 4-1

Regular Inspection Item List

Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 Table 5-5 Table 5-5 Table 5-6 Table 5-7 Table 5-8 Table 5-9 Table 5-10 Table 5-11 Table 5-12 Table 5-13 Table 5-14 Table 5-15 Table 5-16 Table 5-17

If a Job has been Left at Powering on Ethernet Warning List Mail Warning List USB Warning List PDL Warning List PDL Warning List Engine Control Warning List List of Main Warnings PDL Module Error List Engine Control Module Error List Operation Module Error List Main Module Error List Setup Error List Panel Control Module Error List Spool Module Error List Error Log Print Item Error Log Classification List Job Log Print Item

4-2 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-14 5-16 5-17

CONTENTS-9

Table 6-1 Table 6-1 Table 6-2

Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (1/2) Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (2/2) Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes

6-4 6-5 6-6

Table 7-1 Table 7-2

Engine Test Pattern List Image Quality Defects List

7-2 7-7

Table 8-1

Maintenance Priority

Table 9-1 Table 9-2

Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

Table 10-1

Symbol Table

CONTENTS-10

8-69 9-8 9-9 10-7

Figures Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-5 Figure 1-6 Figure 1-7 Figure 1-8 Figure 1-9 Figure 1-10

Maintenance Work Procedure Flow External View and Nomenclatures (Front) External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear) External View and Nomenclatures (Interior) External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel) Maintenance Space Card Slot on Device Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card Extract File Configuration

Figure 8-1

Nomenclatures of Covers

Figure 10-1 Figure 10-2 Figure 10-3 Figure 10-4 Figure 10-5 Figure 10-6

Paper Flow and Name of Each Part Block Diagram - Basic Configuration Overview of Device Configuration Drawing Configuration Block Diagram Controller Block Diagram Data Processing Flowchart

1-1 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-17 1-18 1-19 8-2 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-8 10-23 10-24

CONTENTS-11

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

Chapter 1

Maintenance Work Procedure

Chapter 1 describes the primary maintenance work procedure, necessary tools, and names of components of this device. Also, subsection 1.5 describes a method for updating the version of the system firmware.

1.1

Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

The maintenance work is classified into the regular checking maintenance based on the Maintenance Agreement and the maintenance if a trouble occurs. The work procedure flows of respective cases are shown in Figure 1-1.

Start

Regular check/In case of a trouble

Regular checking maintenance

Maintenance if a trouble occurs

Grasp the situations (problems, complaints, etc.) of the device.

Check the contents of trouble and the situations if a trouble occurs.

Check and clean the parts (See Chapter 4) Replace parts as necessary (See Chapter 8)

Perform the troubleshooting. · If controller is error (See Chapter 5)

or adjust (See Chapter 9).

· If engine is error (See Chapter 6) · If image quality is poor (See Chapter 7)

Check by plotting that no problem occurs.

Replace a faulty part (See Chapter 8) Adjust the replaced part or make adjustment as necessary (See Chapter 9)

End Check that the trouble is removed.

End

Figure 1-1 Maintenance Work Procedure Flow

1-1

1.2

Necessary Tools

Table 1-1 lists tools and measuring instruments necessary for the maintenance. Table 1-1 Necessary Tool List Name CF card

Phillips screwdriver

1 pc

1pc each

Remarks - To write various types of information - To save system files No. 2 magnetized screwdriver (stem length: 100 mm and 200 mm) No. 3 magnetized screwdriver Stubby screwdriver (stem length: 38 mm)

Box screwdriver

1pc

5.5-mm hexagonal bit type

Flat blade screwdriver

1pc

For removing E-rings.

Voltage adjustment screwdriver

1pc

CERAMIC ALIGNER SCREWDRIVER DA-58/+

C snap ring tool

1 pc

Hexagonal wrench

1pc each 1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm

Radio pliers

1pc

Nippers

1pc

Insulock tie

1-2

Quantity

For cutting Insulock tie.

——

Scale

1pc

Cutter

1pc

Digital multi-meter

1pc

For measuring each various power measures. (30900-0926)

Cleaning kit

1 set

For cleaning the interior (Ethanol and cotton swabs )

Vacuum cleaner

1 pc

For cleaning the interior (For toner and handy type)

Tweezers

1pc

For cleaning and/or replace wires.

Waste

——

———

Cotton cloth

——

For cleaning the drum. (30790-0103)

Heat roller cleaner

——

For cleaning fixation roller (heat) and roller (backup).

Contact grease FLOIL FG-60H

——

For greasing lubricates fixation ring (bias).

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

1.3

External View and Nomenclatures

Figures 1-2 to 1-5 respectively show the external view and nomenclatures of the device.

1 Roll 1 drawer (door 1) 2 Roll 2 drawer (door 2) 3 Manual feed drawer (door 4) 4 Paper unfeeding outlet 5 Top door (door 6) 6 Fixation door (door 7) 7 Manual paper feed holder (door 8) 8 Manual feed inlet 9 Toner cover 0 Control panel A Waste toner bottle door

Figure 1-2 External View and Nomenclatures (Front)

1-3

1 Main power switch 2 Power cord 3 Parallel interface connector 4 USB interface connector 5 Ethernet interface connector 6 Cutter door (door 5) 7 Cutter inside door (door 9) 8 Cutter door lower small window (door 10)

Figure 1-3 External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear)

1-4

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

1 Paper feed knob 2 Paper flange

Figure 1-4 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior)

1-5

2LCD The status of this device, as well as a menu to set the device functions appear on a 20- digit, 2-line display.

1LEDs The device status is indicated by LEDs on, flashing, and off.

3Keys Use these keys to set device functions.

Figure 1-5 External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel)

1-6

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

Maintenance Space

300

600

Figure 1-6 shows the spaces necessary to maintain the device.

600 700

900

1652

552

700

1154

2052

300

800

1.4

2054 2554 Installation space

(Dimension of height : 2000 mm) Maintenance space (Unit: mm)

Figure 1-6 Maintenance Space

1-7

1.5

Version Upgrade of System Firmware

This section describes how to version upgrade the system firmware of the device. The device is equipped with multiple firmware items. It is possible to version upgrade items collectively. 1.5.1

Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card The version upgrade CF card is used to upgrade all firmware versions collectively. (This card is common to plotter and MF models.)

- Controller firmware - Engine firmware - Scanner firmware (used in MF model)

1 2 3

Turn on the device and execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list. Turn off the device. Insert the version upgrade CF card into the controller CF card slot. Check DIP switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)

DIP switch for version upgrade. Version upgrade: bit 1=OFF, 2=OFF

OFF 1

2

Figure 1-7 Card Slot on Device

1-8

Card slot

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

4

Turn on the device. In the version upgrade process, the old firmware version is automatically erased and the new version is written in the device. After the start is booted correctly, the first screen appears on the LCD and the process is initiated. LCD displayed S Y S T EM

COP Y

S Y S T EM COP Y COP Y I NG X X X X X X ( N o t e 1 )

Note 1: Description of XXXXXXX During the version upgrade, "ENGINE" is displayed for engine firmware. "SCANNER" is displayed for

S Y S T E M CO P Y S - ERA S I NG X X X ( N o t e 2)

scanner firmware. "SYSTEM" is displayed for controller firmware. Note 2: The down-counter for

S Y S T EM COP Y WR I T I N G X X X

S Y S T EM COP Y COP Y F I N I SHED

5 6 7 8

copying or erasing the controller firmware is displayed.

Normal termination

Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off. Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot. Turn on the device to reboot the system. Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the system firmware is correctly version-upgraded.

Note: Note: Note:

For the MF model, the scanner firmware is not rewritten if its version is same as that registered to the device. If the engine firmware version is the same as or older than the one registered to the device, the overwrite process is not executed. The version-upgrade of the controller firmware is executed unconditionally.

1-9

1.5.2

Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card The maintenance CF card can version upgrade individual firmware items one by one. The version-upgrade using this card is executed by the control panel operation.

(1) LP-1010 version upgrading operation (maintenance open)

1 2 3 4

Turn off the device. Insert the maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot. Check DIP switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.) Turn on the device. Access the FUNCTION menu, specify the target firmware item, and upgrade its version. system.bin: Total system (controller firmware + engine firmware) Pxxxxx.bin: RIP controller firmware (xxxxxx: version) Exxxxx.bin: Engine firmware (xxxxxx: version) Sxxxxx.bin: Scanner firmware (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)

Control panel (example of controller firmware version upgrade )

# V ERS I ON

U PGR ADE

＞

* s y s t em . b i n s y s t em ( 0 1 A ) , *E1_01 . b i n eng i ne ( 1 . 01 )

*E1_01 . b i n OK?

*E1_01 . b i n COP Y I NG ENG I NE

*E1_01 . b i n COP Y F I N I SHE D

1-10

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

5 6 7

1.5.3

Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off. Pull out the maintenance person CF card from the controller CF card slot. Turn on the device to reboot the system.

Other Version Upgrade Operations If addition to the utilization of version upgrade and maintenance CF cards, it is possible to upgrade firmware versions as shown in Table 1-2 by using version upgrade DIP switches of the device. Once DIP switches are set, procedures are the same as normal batch version upgrade process. * In this version upgrade, only the control firmware version, including BOOT ROM, can be upgraded.

Table 1-2 Other Version Upgrade List

(Note 1) (Note 2)

DSW1

DSW2

Description

OFF

OFF

Upgrades all firmware versions in the device collectively. (Normal version upgrade operation)

ON

OFF

Upgrades only the controller firmware version.

OFF

ON

Upgrades only controller firmware and BOOT ROM versions.

ON

ON

Rewrites only the complete controller data, including BOOT ROM. (Setup area is initialized.)

After the version-upgrade, be sure to return DIP switches 1 and 2 to OFF position. Batch version up of each firmware mentioned above cannot be executed with the CF card for maintenance. (DSW1, 2 = OFF, OFF)

1 2

3

Turn off the device. Insert the version-upgrade or maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot. Move DIP switches 1 and 2 to necessary positions according to the purpose (see Table 1-2.) * Correct system file must exist in the /sys holder of each card. Turn on the device. The version upgrade is automatically initiated. During the process, the LCD changes the display as shown below.

1-11

LCD displayed S T AR T I NG

LOAD I NG

VE R - U P

S Y S T EM

COP Y I NG S Y S T EM S Y S CO P Y S T A R T

COP Y I NG S Y S T EM S - ERA S I NG x x x

COP Y I NG WR I T I N G

4 5 6 7

1-12

S Y S T EM xx x

COP Y I NG S Y S T EM COP Y F I N I SHED

Normal termination (DSW, 2=ON, OFF)

COP Y I NG S Y S T EM COP Y F I N I SHED - B T

Normal termination (DSW, 2=OFF, ON)

COP Y I NG S Y S T EM COP Y F I N I SHED - A L

Normal termination (DSW, 2=ON, ON)

Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off. Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot. Turn on the device to reboot the system. Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the target firmware is correctly version-upgraded.

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

1.5.4

Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade If an error message appears during the CF card version upgrade take actions according to Table 1-3.

E

CFCARD

nn n n

nnnn: Error code

E

T ECHCARD

nnnn

nnnn: Error code

1-13

Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List Error code

Measure (for maintenance person)

0001

Erasing the flash memory chip is unsuccessful.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is not booted, replace the MRC2 board.

0002

Erasing the flash memory sector is unsuccessful.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is not booted, replace the MRC2 board.

0003

Flash memory write timeout occurs.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is not booted, replace the MRC2 board.

0004

Flash memory write verify error occurs.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is not booted, replace the MRC2 board.

0050

The system image in the CF card is not V e r s i o n u p g r a d e t h e f i r m w a r e a g a i n u s i n g t h e c o m p a t i b l e w i t h t h e d e v i c e . ( M a g i c correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs, number unmatch) replace the MRC2 board.

0051

Version upgrade the firmware again using the The system image in the CF card does not correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs, contain kernel. replace the MRC2 board.

0053

Version upgrade the firmware again using the T h e s y s t e m i m a g e i n t h e C F c a r d i s correct version upgrade CF card that contains partially destroyed. (CRC error) correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

0054

Version upgrade the firmware again using the The system image in the CF card is not c o r r e c t v e r s i o n u p g r a d e C F c a r d t h a t c o n t a i n s compatible with the device. correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

0055

Version upgrade the firmware again using the The system image in the CF card is not correct version upgrade CF card that contains compatible with the device. (The image correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the size is too large. MRC2 board.

0056

Version upgrade the firmware again using the The file in the CF card does not contain c o r r e c t v e r s i o n u p g r a d e C F c a r d t h a t c o n t a i n s system image. (System comparison error) correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

0100

The version upgrade process is terminated Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error due to short device memory capacity. recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

0101

0052

1-14

Error name and description

With the DSW1 and DSW2 on the board of this device set in OFF and ON positions respectively (or DSW1: ON, DSW2: ON), and use the CF card that T h e v e r s i o n u p g r a d e f i r m w a r e o f t h e contains correct system image to version upgrade the firmware again. device is faulty. If the error recurs or the device is not booted, replace the MRC2 board. Set DIP switches 1 and 2 on the board to ON and OFF positions, respectively, and version upgrade T h e s y s t e m i m a g e i s n o t w r i t t e n t o t h e the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is not booted, replace the MRC2 board. flash memory of the MRC2 board. (Note: The CF card must contain controller system file (file name: system.bin).)

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

Table 1-4 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List Error code

Error name and description

Measure (for maintenance person)

0200

With the DSW1 and DSW2 on the board of this device set in OFF and ON positions respectively (or DSW1: ON, DSW2: ON), version upgrade the The version-upgrade of BOOT ROM is firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is unsuccessful. not booted, replace the MRC2 board. (Note: The CF card must contain controller system file (file name: system.bin).)

0080

Edit the cardid.dat file in the CF card correctly. To The card recognition file (cardid.dat) in the this end, write the following string to the file. CF card age is not correct. SYSTEM:LSP:1.00

0081

CF card read error occurs.

Turn off the device remove the CF card once and reinsert it, turn on the machine, and versionupgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

0082

CF card system image open error occurs.

Turn off the device remove the CF card once and reinsert it, turn on the machine, and versionupgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

0083

The CF card is not inserted into the slot.

Turn off the device insert the CF card into the slot correctly, turn on the machine, and version upgrade the firmware again.

0084

CF card is not correctly mounted.

Turn off the device insert the CF card into the slot correctly, turn on the machine, and version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.

Table 1-5 Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List Error code

Error name and description

Measure (for maintenance person)

0171

An unrecoverable error occurs on the Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error engine side. recurs, replace the MEC board.

017B

Version upgrade the firmware again using the Version upgrade is executed using any other correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs, file than engine firmware file. replace the MRC board.

017C

Contents of engine flash memory cannot Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error be erased. recurs, replace the MEC board.

017D

W r i t e t o e n g i n e f l a s h m e m o r y i s Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error unsuccessful. recurs, replace the MEC board.

017E

Engine firmware checksum error occurs.

Version upgrade the firmware again using the correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs, replace the MRC board.

1-15

Table 1-6 Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List Error code

Error name and description

Measure (for maintenance person)

0009

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error Version up is disabled on the scanner side recurs, replace the MSC2 board.

001D

Communication error occurred between Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error controller and scanner during version up. recurs, replace the MSC2 board.

101D

Writing to the scanner flash memory failed

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs, replace the MSC2 board.

0101

The scanner flash memory was destroyed.

Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs, replace the MSC2 board.

Table 1-7 Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List Error code

1-16

Error name and description

Measure (for maintenance person)

1001

CF card does not exist, or it is not recognized

Insert CF card correctly.

1002

CF card type is incorrect

Insert correct CF card (TECHCARD)

1003

Corresponding file is not found in CF card

Insert CF card in which the system files are stored.

1004

Corresponding file in CF card is illegal.

Check if the system files are destroyed, and insert CF card that stores correct system files.

1100

Correct folder does not exist, or files are not Store system files in correct folder, or insert CF recognized correctly. card already checked for correction operation.

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

1.5.5

Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card The version upgrade CF card contains the total system file where all firmware items of the device are assembled into a single package. For this reason, it is possible to upgrade all firmware versions collectively.

(1) Directory configuration in card The version upgrade CF card supports two directories, each of which contains the information file as shown below. 1 sys directory The version upgrade total system file (system.bin) exists in the / sys directory. The size of this system file is about 3 MB and only one system file is contained in it. If the / sys director does not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when the version-upgrade CF card is used. 2 cardid directory The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the version upgrade card exsists in the \cardid directory. If the ID code of the version upgrade card does not exist in the \cardid directory, the version-upgrade card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "SYSTEM," "machine name," and "version." Example: SYSTEM:LSP:1.00

1 sys

2 cardid

Figure 1-8 Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade

1-17

1.5.6

Explanation of Maintenance CF Card The maintenance CF card is used to upgrade individually each firmware installed the device. Multiple firmware files can be registered in the sys directory.

(1) Configuration of card directories The maintenance CF card supports two directories, each of which contains information files or file as shown below.

1 sys directory The following version upgrade system files exists in the sys directory. Total system file: RIP controller firmware: Engine firmware: Scanner firmware:

system.bin Pxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version) Exxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version) Sxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)

If the /sys directory does not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when the maintenance CF card is used. 2 cardid directory The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the maintenance card exsists in the /cardid directory. If the ID code of the maintenance card does not exist in the /cardid directory, the maintenance card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "TECH," "machine name," and "version." (Here, "version" shows that of the total system file.) Example: TECH:LSP:1.00

1 sys

2 cardid

Figure 1-9 Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card

1-18

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

1.5.7

Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center Version upgrade and maintenance CF cards respectively contain information directories that maintain IDs, firmware versions, and system images. The file that contains these information directories in the compressed form is provided to individual service centers so that CF cards can be created in each office. (To execute the online version-upgrade, use the system.bin file on the sys directory.)

(1) How to create the version-upgrade CF card

1 2 3 4

Prepare a CF card writer. (Commercially available product is acceptable.) Prepare the card formatted in FAT16 or FAT32. (FAT16 is recommended. Formatted cards are commercially available.) Prepare and extract the data compressed file discussed above. Directories and files are loaded to the PC. (See Figure 1-10.) Using the card writer, copy /sys and /cardid directories to the CF card. If the fresh CF card is used, it is not necessary to format it with the PC.

- Cardid and sys directories must always be copied to the CF card.

/LP1010-01A

/sys

/cardid

Figure 1-10 Extract File Configuration

1-19

1.5.8

Version Upgrade by Web Browser Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version upgrade by the Web browser from the host computer. As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory. The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade using the "system.bin" file.

1 2 3

1-20

Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin) Using the "remote-control startup procedures" described in the User's guide allows the browser to display the plotter's Web screen. Click "Maintenance" in the left menu list to open the Maintenance window.

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

4

On the left menu list, enter the following maintenance password into the Password box

and click [Login]. CSCCSUDR (8 half-size characters) 5 Clicking Special Maintenance, the third menu on the Maintenance window, will open the Special Maintenance window. There is no task on this window. Click Next. 6 Use the View button at the center of the System Change window to select the prepared RIP system. Click Send to Printer. It takes several seconds until the next screen appears after the data transfer is started. The initiation of data transfer is indicated on the operation panel of the device. 7 Check the system version on the System Change window and, if it is OK, click System Change. (The run time is about 3 to 4 minutes.) 8 When the next screen appears, the version upgrade procedures through the browser are completed. Upon completion of version upgrade procedures, the device is rebooted automatically. Note: If the plotter is turned off during the system firmware version-upgrade process, contents of the flash memory are broken and resultantly the device cannot be booted correctly. If this is your case, it is necessary to write the system firmware from the CF card to the flash memory and upgrade system firmware versions from the host computer again. Pay special attention when the machine is away from the computer. Note: Use the Netscape Communicator 4.5 or later or Internet Explorer 4.5 or later. (1) Error Following errors may be displayed on the host computer. ■ The downloaded file did not pass the header check. Cause: An error occurred during the download. Type of error: File format error ■ The plotter acknowledged NG against the version-upgrade request. Cause: An error occurred during the download. Type of error: The version upgrade rejection error ■ An error occurred during the CRC check. Cause: The system file is damaged. Corrective action: Download the system file again and retry the CRC check. When the error recurs, consult the supplier.

1-21

1.5.9

Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version upgrade by the FTP protocol from the host computer. As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory. The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade the "system.bin" file.

1 2 3 4

Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin) Enter the plotter IP address to log in the device. Enter the user name. Furthermore, enter the password "downloading." Use the "put" command to send the system file of the network controller firmware to the plotter.

* Example of operation on Personal computer. > ftp Name: downloading ○

○

○

Password: downloading

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

ftp>bin ftp>put ftp>quit > ○

○

○

5

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Enter the plotter IP address. (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) User name prepared for downloading the system (down loading) Enter the same string as the user name (i.e. "downloading"). Change the binary mode. Enter the system file name (system.bin). Completed ftp protocol.

Upon completion of version-upgrade, use the "quit" command to quit the "ftp" command. This device is automatically rebooted.

(1) Error Following errors may be displayed on the host computer. ■ When the plotter is occupied by other user, the following error message appears. 421 Service not available, closing control connection (XXXX). XXXX: 0001 -- Either netd, centroD, or testD is working. 0002 -- The device is not in idle state (i.e. the plotter is under operation.) ■ When the version-upgrade process is failed, the following error message appears. 553 Requested action not taken (XXXX). XXXX: 001 -- The file is not normally formatted. 002 -- CRC check error (before writing to the flash memory) 003 -- CRC check error (after writing to the flash memory) 004 -- Flash write error 005 -- The file is transferred in the ASCII mode. **** -- Either error code listed on pages 1-13 and 1-14 is displayed.

1-22

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure

Note: If the device is turned off during the system version-upgrade, the contents of the flash memory are damaged to prevent the machine from correct bootup. If this is your case, it is necessary to write the system program in the IC card and resend the upgraded version from the host computer to the device.

(2) LCD display on the device side during online version-upgrade The following appears on the LCD of the device during the online version upgrade through the Web browser or FTP protocol.

Remo t e

Cop y

Note: The display shown in the left figure lasts (for about one minute) when upgrading the engine firmware (and the scanner

Remo t e Co p y S Y S COP Y S T AR T

firmware for MF model).

Remo t e Co p y S - E RA S I NG X X X

Remo t e Co p y WR I T I N G X X X

Remo t e Co p y COP Y F I N I SH ED Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off.

1-23

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Chapter 2

Engine Maintenance Mode

The engine maintenance mode is used in the periodic inspection or troubleshooting. Chapter 2 describes the engine maintenance mode function and operation.

2-1

2.1

Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation

To troubleshoot the device, it is necessary to enter the engine maintenance mode. The engine maintenance mode should be operated using the keys on the control panel while checking screens displayed on the LCD. In the engine maintenance mode, only six keys, [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ENTER], and [CANCEL], are used. Other keys are not used.

2.1.1

Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode To enter the engine maintenance mode, use the following procedures: 1 Turn on the device while holding down [ ] and[ ] keys on the operation panel. The screen appears on the LCD as shown below. ENG I N E F / W ( 1 . 10 ) 2004 - 08 - 20 Engine firmware version

Engine firmware creation date (year/month/day)

On the second line, engine firmware version and engine firmware creation date (year/ month/day) are displayed. 2 When the following message appears after several seconds,

I NPUT

P A S S WO R D

Press [ ] and [ ] keys in order and then press the [ENTER] key. Hint:

No matter whether keys are pressed in correct or incorrect order, the buzzer will sound.

3 After correct keys are pressed, the screen changes as follows. ENG I N E MA I N T ENANCE

Hint:

MO D E

When necessary keys are not pressed or keys are pressed in incorrect order, the ENGINE MAINTENANCE MODE screen will not appear. In this case, turn off the device once and retry the procedures from Step (1).

4 After several seconds, the "MAINTENANCE CODE 01" screen appears as shown below.

2-2

ODOME T E R

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.1.2

Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel In the engine maintenance mode, toggle and select the desired numerical value or string, which is sandwiched by angle brackets on the LCD, with keys on the control panel. The device supports "select" and "set" modes for the display. When the numerical value is marked by an underscore, the "set" mode is active.

(1) "Select" and "select and enter" Selection refers to the operation where the angle-bracketed numerical value or string is changed to/from another one with the [ ] or [ ] key. "Select and enter" refers to the operation where the [ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the selection.

(2) "Set" and "set and enter" Setup refers to the operation where the digit marked by the underscore in the angle brackets is increased or decreased with the [ ] or [ ] key or the underscore is moved with the [ ] or [ ] key. "Set and enter" refers to the operation where the [ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the setting. mm < 7 0 2 >

(3) Maintenance code and subcode First, select and enter a maintenance code. Then, select or set a subcode. 1 Select the angle-bracketed maintenance code, mm using [ ] or [ ] keys. < mm >

"Maintenance code, mm, display."

2 After the [ENTER] key is pressed to select- enter the code, the angle-bracketed subcode, ss, appears next to it. In this condition, check the contents and perform the maintenance. mm < s s >

"Maintenance code, mm, subcode, ss, display."

3 After the subcode is select and enter or set and enter, the maintenance code and subcode are connected with a hyphen (-). In this condition, select the desired parameter and perform the maintenance.

mm - s s

2-3

2.2

Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu

Table 2-1 shown below lists valid maintenance codes and maintenance and diagnostic menu selections. Table 2-1 Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List Maintenance code 01

Function

Refer item

ODOMETER

Displays the total print distance.

2.3.1

LIFE

Displays the print distance counted until the replacement of a part, as well as allowable next print distance. Clears the print distance counted until the replacement of a part.

2.3.2

03

CLEANING

Displays the print distance counted until the cleaning of a part, as well as allowable next print distance. Clears the print distance counted until the cleaning of parts.

2.3.3

04

ERROR LOG

Displays the unrecoverable error information.

2.3.4

05

JAM LOG

Displays the paper jam error information.

2.3.5

06

SENSOR

Displays the status of sensors and switches. Controls the buzzer sound so that you can identify the change in status.

2.3.6

07

THERMISTOR

Displays the status of thermistors and halogen lamp.

2.3.7

08

ACTUATOR

Displays the status of motors, clutches, and fans. Runs these devices independently.

2.3.8

09

TEST

Executes complex operations to adjust the voltage and current of the high-voltage power unit, and prints the paper to adjust the nip pressure.

2.3.9

10

PRINT

Selects any of 18 test patterns supported by the engine and prints the selected pattern.

2.3.10

11

REGULATE

Executes the adjustment printout required as a result of change in engine control parameters such as front edge and side registrations.

2.3.11

12

PARAMETER

Changes the engine control parameters in RAM value.

2.3.12

13

NVRAM

Saves the engine control parameters RAM value to NVRAM. Initializes NVRAM.

2.3.13

14

USER PARAMETER

Changes the RAM value of user-defined parameters.

2.3.14

15

ROLL WIDTH

Changes the print width of the paper roll.

2.3.15

16

PROCESS LOG

Displays the process cartridge information.

2.3.16

02

2-4

Display

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.2.1

Operation for Select and Enter Operation the Maintenance Code Display maintenance code 01 according to the procedures described in Section 2.1.1 "Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode." Select the maintenance code using [ ] or [ ] key, and press the [ENTER] key to select and enter the code.

"MAINTENANCE CODE



01 DISPLAY" (To Section 2.3.1)

O D OM E T E R

"MAINTENANCE CODE 02 DISPLAY"

L I FE

(To Section 2.3.2)

"MAINTENANCE CODE

RO L L

WI DTH

15 DISPLAY" (To Section 2.3.15)

"MAINTENANCE CODE

PROCE S S

L OG

16 DISPLAY" (To Section 2.3.16)

When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, you can return to the MAINTENANCE CODE 01 screen without using the [ ] or [ ] key. When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine firmware version described in Section 2.3.1 1 is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key, the maintenance code selection window reappears. When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine board version is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key, the maintenance code selection window reappears.

2-5

2.3

Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus

Maintenance and diagnostic menus classified with maintenance codes are furthermore divided into detailed subcoded categories. This section describes various operations based on maintenance codes and subcodes.

2.3.1

Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance)

(1) Function This code displays the total print distance (in meter) and total print count. Maintenance code

Subcode

Display

Function

01

01 Total 12345 m

Displays the total print distance.

02

01 Roll-1 10000 m

Displays the total print distance of roll 1.

03

01 Roll-2 20000 m

Displays the total print distance of roll 2.

04

01 Roll-3 300 m

Displays the total print distance of roll 3.

05

01 Sheet 45 m

Displays the total print distance of manual feed.

06

01 Total Count 5678

Displays the total print count.

01

Whenever one drawing is normally plotted, the total print distance and print count are increased. If an error such as paper jam occurs or the process is terminated during the printout of drawing, the total distance and count are not increased since the drawing is incomplete. For about 400-mm long blank space that is fed while "DOOR OPEN CUT" or "TOP EDGE CUT TIMER" is being enabled, the total print distance is increased but the total print count maintains the current value.

2-6

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

In the total print count, the increment is 1 for manual feeding. For the paper roll, the increment is determined by the length and width of the roll necessary to print one drawing, as shown in the table below. Length

Up to (mm)

Count-up value

Up to (lines)

A3 width equivalent paper roll 594 mm, 610 mm, 620 mm, 700 mm, 707 mm, 22 inch, 24 inch

A1 width equivalent paper roll 594 mm, 610 mm, 620 mm, 700 mm, 707 mm, 22 inch, 24 inch

460

10867

1

2

920

21733

2

3

1380

32599

3

4

1840

43465

4

6

2300

54332

5

8

2760

65198

6

9

3220

76064

7

10

3680

86930

8

12

4140

97797

9

13

4600

108663

10

15

5060

119529

11

18

5520

130395

13

19

5980

141261

14

21

6440

152128

15

22

6900

162994

16

24

7360

173860

17

25

7820

184726

18

27

8280

195593

19

28

8740

206459

20

30

9200

217325

21

31

9660

228191

22

33

10120

239058

24

36

A3 (297 mm×420 mm), 11 inch×17 inch, 12 inch×18 inch: 1 count-up A1 (594 mm×841 mm), 22 inch×34 inch, 24 inch×36 inch: 3 count-up

2-7

Length

Up to (mm)

Count-up value

Up to (lines)

A2-size-in-width equivalent paper roll 420 mm, 440 mm, 450 mm, 500 mm, 17 inch, 18 inch

A0-size-in-width equivalent paper roll 841 mm, 880 mm, 900 mm, 910 mm, 914 mm, 30 inch, 34 inch, 36 inch

320

7560

1

2

640

15119

2

3

960

22678

3

4

1280

30237

4

5

1600

37796

5

6

1920

45355

6

8

2240

52914

7

9

2560

60473

8

10

2880

68033

9

11

3200

75592

10

13

3520

83151

11

14

3840

90710

12

15

4160

98269

14

17

4480

105828

15

19

4800

113387

16

20

5120

120946

17

21

5440

128505

18

23

5760

136065

19

24

6080

143624

20

25

6400

151183

21

26

6720

158742

22

27

7040

166301

23

29

7360

173860

24

30

7680

181419

25

31

8000

188978

26

33

8320

196537

28

34

8640

204097

29

35

8960

211656

30

37

9280

219215

31

39

9600

226774

32

40

9920

234333

33

41

10240

241892

34

43

A2 (420 mm×594 mm), 17 inch×22 inch), 18 inch×24 inch: 2 count-up A0 (841 mm×1189 mm), 34 inch×44 inch), 36 inch×48 inch: 5 count-up

2-8

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for displaying the total print distance 1 If maintenance code 01 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the total print distance of the maintenance code 01, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking. 3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 01" display comes back.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 01 DISPLAY"

O D OM E T E R

01

To t a l 12345 m

01

Ro l l - 1 10000 m

01

Ro l l - 2 2000 m

01

Ro l l - 3 300 m

01< 0 5 >

Shee t 45 m

01

To t a l 12345

Cou n t

2-9

2.3.2

Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information)

(1) Function As the part replacement information, the print distance after part replacement and the replacement criteria are displayed. Also, the print distance after part replacement can be cleared to "0" by selecting and entering a subcode. However, for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0." Note: The print distance must be cleared when a part was replaced.

Maintenance code

Subcode 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

02

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Display

Replace criteria

02

TH01, 02, 04 12345 m/ 100km

Thermistor

100 km

02

TC Wire 12345 m/ 20km

Charge wire (2)

20 km

02

DC Wire 12345 m/ 20km

Charge wire (3)

20 km

02

Ozone Filter 12345 m/ 50km

Ozone filter

50 km

02

Heat Roll 12345 m/ 100km

Finger (Fuser) Assy

100 km

02

Pressure Roll 12345 m/ 100km

Roller (Heat)

100 km

02

Mag. Blade 12345 m/ 100km

Roller (Backup)

100 km

02

12345 m/ 100km

Blade (DV) Assy

100 km

02

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

12345 m/

0km

Spare

No criteria

02 02 02 02 02 02

02

TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 1 2 3 4 5 m/ 1 0 0 Km

Print distance after part replacement

2-10

Replacement part name

Part name

Part replacement criterion

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information 1 If maintenance code 02 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of maintenance code 02, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, "maintenance code 02" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as shown on the next page.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 02 DISPLAY"

LI FE

02

TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km

02

TC W i r e 12345 m/

02

12345

m/

(To next page)

20 Km

0 Km

(

key is inactive

for spare parts)

02

12345

m/

0 Km

(

key is inactive

for spare parts)

2-11

(3) Operation for clearing part replacement information The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part was replaced, taking an example of subcode 01. 1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is displayed if the replaced part is selected and entered. 2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part replacement is cleared to "0." 3 The "maintenance code 02, subcode 01" display comes back, and the print distance "0" after part replacement is displayed. 4 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 02, subcode 01" display comes back without clearing the print distance.

02

TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km

"MAINTENANCE CODE 02, SUBCODE 01 DISPLAY"

(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous page)

(

0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 C l e a r OK ? )

02

TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 0 m / 1 0 0 Km

Print distance after replacement becomes "0."

2-12

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.3.3

Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information)

(1) Function As the part cleaning information, the print distance after part cleaning and the cleaning criteria are displayed. Also, the print distance after part cleaning can be cleared to "0" by selecting a subcode. However, for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0." Note: Maintenance code

Subcode 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

03

The print distance must be cleared when a part was cleaned.

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Location or part name to be cleaned

Display

Cleaning criteria

03

TH01, 02, 04 12345 m/ 5 km

Thermistor

5 km

03

TC Wire 12345 m/ 5 km

Change wire (2)

5 km

03

DC Wire 12345 m/ 5 km

Change wire (3)

5 km

03

SLA 12345 m/ 5 km

SLA

5 km

03

Tracking Roll 12345 m/ 5 km

Roller (1)

5 km

03

Heat Roll 12345 m/ 5 km

Roller (Heat)

5 km

03

Pressure Roll 12345 m/ 5 km

Roller (Backup)

5 km

03

Regist Roll 12345 m/ 10 km

Roller (Height)

10 km

03

Cutter Roll 12345 m/ 10 km

Roller (Cutway)

10 km

03

PF. Roll 12345 m/ 10 km

Roller (Paper feed 1, 2)

10 km

03

Spacer DV 12345 m/ 5 km

Spacer (CV)

5 km

03

Fuser Finger 12345 m/ 10 km

Finger (Fuser) ASSY

10 km

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

12345 m/ 0 km

Spare

No criterion

03

TC W i r e 1 2 3 4 5m /

Part name

5 Km

Print distance after part cleaning Part cleaning criterion

2-13

(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information 1 If maintenance code 03 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter a Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of the maintenance code 03, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 03" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as shown on the next page.

C L E AN I NG

"MAINTENANCE CODE 03 DISPLAY"

03

TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 12345 m/ 5 Km

03

TC W i r e 12345 m/

5 Km

12345

0 Km

03

(To next page)

(

m/

key is inactive

for spare parts)

03

12345

(

m/

key is inactive

0 Km for spare parts)

2-14

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(3) Operation for clearing part cleaning information The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part was cleaned, taking an example of subcode 02. 1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is displayed if the cleaned part is selected and entered. 2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part cleaning is cleared to "0." The "maintenance code 03, subcode 02" display comes back, and the print distance "0" after part cleaning is displayed. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 03, subcode 02" display comes back without clearing the print distance.

03

TC Wi r e 12345 m/

"MAINTENANCE CODE 03 SUB CODE 02 DISPLAY"

5 Km

(Return to previous page) (Continue of previous page)

(

03 - 02 TC Wi r e C l e a r OK ?

)

03

TC Wi r e 0 m/

5 Km

Print distance after part cleaning becomes "0."

2-15

2.3.4

Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)

(1) Function This code displays up to ten latest unrecoverable errors. Maintenance code

Subcode 01

Display 04 [2032] 03-06 (09:30)

Function

R1N A2 12340 m

Displays the information on the latest unrecoverable error. Displays the information on the second latest unrecoverable error.

02 01 : 10

: 04 [

: Displays the information on the tenth latest unrecoverable error. (If there is no error log, the error code is left blank.)

]

An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows: Error code

04 [ 2032 ] 03 - 06 (09 : 30 )

R1N A2 1 2 3 4 0m

Date of error occurrence Month/day/hour/minute (March 6, 9H30M)

2-16

Information on paper used when error occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width

equivalent to A2) Total print distance when error occurred

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Meaning of six-character "paper information"

1st and 2nd characters (Paper supply source)

Meaning

R1

Roll 1

R2

Roll 2

SH

Manual feed Paper supply source is not identified.

3rd and 4th characters (Type of paper)

Meaning

N

Normal pape

T1

Tracing paper (tracing paper mode 1)

T2

Tracing paper (tracing paper mode 2)

F

Film Paper type is not identified.

5th and 6th characters (paper width)

Meaning

A0

A0 width equivalent roll paper (841 mm) Roll paper having the following width: 36 inch, 34 inch, 30 inch, 914 mm, 910 mm, 900 mm, and 880 mm

A1

A1 width equivalent roll paper (594 mm) Roll paper having the following width: 24 inch, 22 inch, 707 mm, 770 mm, 620 mm, and 610 mm

A2

A2 width equivalent roll paper (420 mm) Roll paper having the following width: 18 inch, 17 inch, 500 mm, 450 mm, and 440 mm

A3

A3 width equivalent roll paper (420 mm) Roll paper having the following width: 12 inch, 11 inch, 310 mm Paper supply source is not identified.

2-17

(2) Operation for displaying unrecoverable error log 1 If maintenance code 04 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter a Maintenance Code," the unrecoverable error log of the maintenance code 04, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking. 3 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 04" display comes back.

2-18

ERROR

L OG

"MAINTENANCE CODE 04 DISPLAY"

04 [2032 ] 03 - 06 (09 : 30 )

R1N A2 1 2 3 4 0m

04 [ 2032 ] 03 - 05 (18 : 32 )

R1N A3 1 2 3 0 0m

04 [

]

04 [

]

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(3) Unrecoverable error codes and description

Table 2-2 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes Unrecoverable error codes 2020 2021, 2022 2023 2024, 202A

Description BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble PM01 (process motor) trouble CM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble

2026, 202B

TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble

2027, 202C

FM01 (paper feed pulse motor 1) trouble

2028, 202D

FM02 (paper feed pulse motor 2) trouble

2029, 202E

FM03 (paper feed pulse motor 3) trouble

2030

Power supply failure (50Hz/60Hz evaluation value is abnormal)

2032

High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)

2033

Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power turns off)

2035

LED head correction data transfer error (time out)

2036

LED head correction data transfer error (header error)

2037

LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)

2081

TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature

2082

TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)

2083

TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp

2084

After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH01 did not reach specified temp within specified time

2085

TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted) or extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)

2086

TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp

2087

TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)

2088

TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp

2089

After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH04 did not reach specified temp within specified time

20C1-20C3

NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)

20C4

NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)

20C5

NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)

20C6

NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)

20C8

NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)

20C9

NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)

20CA

NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)

20D1-20D8

NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)

20E0

WDT (watchdog timer) overflow

2D01

NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned

2D02

Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned

2D03

In receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times

2D04

Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned

2F7C

After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7D

After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written to the flash memory (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7E

After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7F

After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match the contents of SRAM (F/W cannot be restored)

2-19

2.3.5

Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log)

(1) Function This code displays up to ten latest paper jam errors. Maintenance code

Subcode

Display

Feature

01

05 [3702] 03-07 (10:58)

R1N A3 12345 m

Displays the information on the latest paper jam error.

02

05 [3702] 03-05 (18:25)

R1N A3 12300 m

Displays the information on the second latest paper jam error.

05 : 10

: 05 [

: Displays the information on the tenth latest paper jam error. (If there is no error log, the error code is left blank.)

]

An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows: Error code

05 [3702 ] 03 - 07 (10 : 58 ) Date of error occurrence Month day hour minute (March 7, 10H58M)

R1N A3 1 2 3 4 5m

Total print distance when error

Information on paper used when error occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width equivalent to A3)

occurred

The meaning of the six-character "paper information" is the same as that explained in Section 2.3.4 "MAINTENANCE CODE 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)."

2-20

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for displaying paper jam error log 1 If maintenance code 05 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter a Maintenance Code," the latest paper jam error information of the maintenance code 05, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 05" display comes back.

J AM

L OG

"MAINTENANCE CODE 05 DISPLAY"

05 [ 3702 ] 03 - 07 ( 10 : 58 )

R1N A3 1 2 3 4 5m

05 [ 3701 ] 03 - 05 (18 : 25 )

R1N A3 1 2 3 0 0m

05 [3601 ] 0 2 -1 8 ( 1 5 : 0 3 )

R2T1A1 1 2 0 0 0m

05 [

]

2-21

(3) Paper jam error codes and description Table 2-3 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes Doors to open for removing the paper

Paper jam error codes

Description

3330

Paper is located at PS30 (under cutter) position

3331

Paper is located at PS31 (under cutter) position

3332

Paper is located at PS32 (under cutter) position

Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper feed

Door 5 and then Door 1

3400

Paper is located at PS04 (under cutter) position

3401, 3402

Arrival of paper top edge at PS04 is too early

3403, 3404

Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04

3491, 3492

When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too early

3493, 3494

When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04 Door 5 and then Door 1 after preset paper pass time elapsed

3500 3501, 3502

Arrival of paper top edge at PS05 is too early Paper top edge does not arrive at PS05

3591, 3592

Paper trail edge leaves PS05 too early

3593, 3594

Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 after preset paper pass time elapsed

3600 3601, 3602 3603, 3604

Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position

Paper trail edge leaves PS06 too early

3693, 3694

3703, 3704

Door 5 Door 5 and then Door 1

Paper is located in PS07 (fuser) position

Door 6

Door6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4

Door 6

Door6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4 Door 6

Door 6

Door6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4

Door 6

Door6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4

Arrival of paper top edge at PS07 is too early Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04

3791, 3792

Paper trail edge leaves PS07 too early

3793, 3794

Paper trail edge does not leave PS07 after preset paper pass time elapsed

3042-3047

Trouble when cutter blade moves

Door1: Door2: Door4: Door5: Door6: Door7: Door8: Door9: Door10:

Roll 1 (top) drawer Roll 2 (middle) drawer Manual feed drawer Cutter door Top cover Fixation door Manual paper feeding holder Cutter door inside Cutter door lower small door

Door 6 Door 5

PS21 PS22 CNCT INT3 MS08, INT1 MS06 MS07 (No open-close detection senor) (No open-close detection senor)

Door 1 means either Door 1 or Door 2. To open the Door 7, the Door 8 must be opened first. To open the Door 9, the Door 5 must be opened first.

2-22

(Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4

Door 6

Paper top edge does not arrive at PS06

Paper trail edge does not leave PS06 after preset paper pass time elapsed

3701, 3702

Door 6

Arrival of paper top edge at PS06 is too earl

3691, 3692

3700

Door 1

Paper is located in PS04 (register) position

3503, 3504

Manual paper feed

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.3.6

Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor)

(1) Function This code displays the status of sensors and switches. Maintenance code

Subcode 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12

06

13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Display 06 Beep

OFF

06 PS30 OFF 06 PS31 OFF 06 PS32 OFF 06 PS04 OFF 06 PS05 OFF 06 PS06 OFF 06 PS07 OFF 06 PS11 ON 06 PS12 ON 06 PS15 OFF 06 PS21 ON 06 PS22 ON 06 MS04 ON 06 MS05 ON 06 MS06 ON 06 MS07 ON 06 MS08 ON 06 INT1 ON 06 INT3 ON 06 CNCT ON 06 RE01 OFF 06 RE02 ON 06 TS01 ON 06 TS02 OFF

Function

Status

Enables or disables the buzzer used to identify the status of relevant devices. Displays the status of the paper width judge sensor. (A0 width or more) Displays the status of the paper width judge sensor. (A1 width or more) Displays the status of the paper width judge sensor. (A2 width or more) Displays the status of the paper detection sensor (cutter lower). Displays the status of the paper detection sensor (registration). Displays the status of the paper detection sensor (suction). Displays the status of the paper detection sensor (fixation). Displays the status of the roll 1 flange detection sensor. Displays the status of the roll 2 flange detection sensor. Displays the status of the manual feed paper detection sensor. Displays the status of the roll 1 drawer open/close detection sensor. (Door 1) Displays the status of the roll 2 drawer open/close detection sensor. (Door 2) Displays the status of the toner door open/close switch. Displays the status of the waste toner bottle detection switch. Displays the status of the fixation door open/close switch. (Door 7) Displays the status of the manual feed holder open/close switch. Displays the status of the upper door (left side) open/close switch. (Door 6) Displays the status of the upper door open/close interlock switch. (Door 6) Displays the status of the cutter door open/close interlock switch. (Door 5) Displays the status of the manual feed drawer open/close connector. (Door 4) Displays the status of the cutter blade detection (right edge) micro switch. Displays the status of the cutter blade detection (left edge) micro switch.

ON: Buzzer works. OFF: Buzzer does not work.

ON: Paper exists. OFF: Paper does not exist.

ON: Roll flanges exist. OFF: Roll flange does not exist. ON: Paper exists. OFF: Paper does not exist.

ON: Close OFF: Open

ON: Bottle exists. OFF: Bottle does not exist.

ON: Close OFF: Open

ON: Cutter blade exists. OFF: Cutter blade does not exist.

Displays the status of the toner sensor.

ON: Toner exists. Displays the status of the waste toner OFF: Toner does not exist. sensor

2-23

(2) Operation for displaying the sensor status 1 If maintenance code 06 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the buzzer set of the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each sensor. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 06" display comes back. 4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed during the setup of buzzer (subcode 00), you can enable or disable the buzzer whose tone is changed according to the status of sensors and switches, as described on the next page.

S E NSOR

"MAINTENANCE CODE 06 DISPLAY"

06

Beep

06

PS3 0

OFF

ON

06

TS01 ON

06

TS0 2 OF F

2-24

To next page

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(3) Operation for buzzer enable/disable setting On the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 screen, you can enable or disable the buzzer whose tone is changed according to the status of sensors and switches. 1 When subcode 00 is selected and entered, the parameter that shows the setting opposite to the current valid setting is displayed. 2 Press [ENTER] key. The buzzer setting will change from ON to OFF and vice versa. 3 Press [CANCEL] key. The current setting is maintained. "MAINE. CODE 06 SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"

06

Beep

OFF

(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous page)

06 - 00

Beep

OF F < ON >

06

Beep

ON

Setting changes from OFF to ON.

Hint:

After ON is selected, the buzzer sounds in different tone depending on the status of the sensors or switches selected from SUBCODE 01 through 26. When the sensor is turned on, the long beep sound is generated. When the sensor is turned off, the short beep sound is generated. When the maintenance code 06 “SENSOR” display is closed, this “06” mode is quitted.

2-25

2.3.7

Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor)

(1) Function This code displays the status of thermistors and halogen lamp. Hint:

In Subcode 01, 03, and 04, an asterisk (*) shows the status of two halogen lamps of the fixation device. While the halogen lamp to heat the central area is being turned on, the status is indicated with the 10th character. While the halogen lamp to heat both side areas is being turned on, the status is indicated with the 6th character.

Maintenance code

Subcode

Display

Status

-

01

07 TH01 * 123 ˚ C

TH01: Displays the temperature at the center of the fixation.

02

07 TH02 NORMAL

OVERHEAT: TH02: Displays whether the Overheat is detected. overheated fixation is NORMAL: detected. Overheat is not detected.

03

07 TH02 * * 32 ˚ C

TH03: Displays the temperature of the LED head.

-

04

07 TH04 * 100 ˚ C

TH04: Displays the temperature at the left end of the fixation.

-

07

Hint:

2-26

Function

The lower display limit of temperatures of TH1 and TH4 is 45°C. If there is any disconnection, 45°C or 51°C is displayed.

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for checking thermistor status 1 If maintenance code 07 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 07, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each thermistor for checking. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the [maintenance code 07] display comes back.

T H E RM I S T OR

"MAINTENANCE CODE 07 DISPLAY"

07

07

TH0 1 *

123 ºC

TH0 2 NORMA L

07 *

TH0 3 *

07 *

TH0 4

32 º C

10 0 º C

2-27

2.3.8

Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator)

(1) Function This code displays the status of the system equipment such as high-voltage power unit, motor, and clutch, and specifies their operations. Hint: Maintenance code

Subcode 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

08

09

08

10

11 12 13

14

15

16

17

18

19

2-28

When maintenance code 08 is active, errors such as a door open error are not detected. Display

Function Turns off major actuators.

08 Actuator 08 CC

Status or operation parameter OFF: OFF

OFF

Displays the status of the charge unit (CC) and specifies its operation.

OFF

Displays the status of the developer unit (DB) and specifies its operation.

OFF

Displays the status of the transcription ON: ON unit (TC) and specifies its operation. OFF: OFF

OFF

Displays the status of the separator (DC) and specifies its operation.

OFF

Displays the status of the dischange (EL) and specifies its operation.

OFF

Displays the status of the process ON: Rotated motor and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped

OFF

Displays the status of the heat roller ON: Rotated pulse motor and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped

08 DB 08 TC 08 DC 08 EL 08 PM01 08 HM01

08 GM01 OFF

08 BM01 OFF

08 TM01 OFF

08 FM01 OFF 08 FM02 OFF 08 FM03 OFF

ON1: Developing direction Displays the status of the developer CW-ON unit pulse motor and specifies its ON2: Toner stirring direction operation. CW-ON OFF: Stopped Displays the status of the waste toner ON: Rotated bottle vibration monitor and specifies OFF: Stopped its operation. ON1: Paper feed direction CCW-ON Displays the status of the paper feed ON2: Rewinding direction pulse motor and specifies its operation. CW-ON OFF: Stop Displays the status of the paper feed 1 ON1: Paper feed direction and specifies its operation. CW-ON Displays the status of the paper feed 2 ON2: Rewinding direction and specifies its operation. CCW-ON Displays the status of the paper feed 3 OFF: Stop and specifies its operation.

OFF

Displays the status of the registration roller clutch and specifies its operation. ON: Engaged Displays the status of the paper feed OFF: Disengaged

OFF

roller clutch and specifies its operation.

08 CL04

08 CL06

08 BL01 OFF 08 BL02 OFF 08 BL03 OFF 08 BL06 OFF

Displays the status of the suction fan and specifies its operation. ON1: Rotated fast Displays the status of the fixation ON2: Rotated slowly device top center fan and specifies its OFF: Stopped operation. Displays the status of the charge unit ON: Rotated fan and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped Displays the status of the fixation top ON1: Rotated fast b o t h e d g e f a n a n d s p e c i f i e s i t s ON2: Rotated slowly OFF: Stopped operation.

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for checking the actuator status 1 If maintenance code 08 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 08, subcode 00 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display current status of each actuator for checking. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 08" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation of the actuators can be specified as shown in (3) or (4) on the following pages.

AC T UA TOR

"MAINTENANCE CODE 08 DISPLAY"

08

Ac t ua t o r

08

CC OFF

08

BL03 OFF

08

BL06

o f f

(To next page )

(To page 2-31)

(To page 2-31)

(To page 2-31)

OFF

2-29

(3) Operation for turning off the actuators With the maintenance code 08, subcode 00, main actuators can be turned off. 1 If subcode 00 is selected and entered, parameter is displayed. 2 Press the [ENTER] key to execute the actuator OFF. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the actuator OFF is not executed. 08

Ac t ua t o r

o f f

"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"

(Continued from previous page) (Return to previous page)

08 - 00

Ac t ua t o r o f f

Actuator OFF is executed

08

Ac t ua t o r

o f f

The actuators changed by the actuator off operation and the statuses immediately after actuator off operation are as listed below: Actuator

2-30

CC

Charger

DB

Developer

TC

Transcription

DC

Separator

EL

Delectrification

PM01

Process motor

HM01

Heat roller pulse motor

GM01

Developer unit pulse motor

BM01

Waste toner bottle vibration motor

TM01

Paper feed pulse motor

FM01

Paper feed pulse motor 1

FM02

Paper feed pulse motor 2

FM03

Paper feed pulse motor 3

CUTM

Cutter motor

CL04

Registration roller clutch

CL06

Manual feed roller clutch

BL01

Suction fan

Status immediately after "OFF" entry

OFF: OFF

OFF: Stopped

OFF: Stopped OFF: Disengaged OFF: Stopped

BL02

Fixation top center fan

ON: Rotated

BL03

Charging unit fan

OFF: Stopped

BL06

Fixation top both edge fan

ON: Rotated

FL01

Fixation halogen lamp (center part)

FL02

Fixation halogen lamp (both edge part)

OFF: Turned off

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(4) Operation for executing actuator operation The following describes the operation for executing the actuator operation, taking an example of subcode 01. 1 If the actuator to be operated is selected and entered, the "ON/OFF" parameter is parenthesized. 2 If the "ON/OFF" parameter is selected and entered, the selected operation is executed. The display returns to "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" and the "ON/OFF" status changes to the specified one. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during selection of "ON/OFF" parameter, the "ON/OFF" is not changed and the "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" display comes back.

0 8

"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 01DISPLAY"

CC OF F

(Continued from Page 2-29) (Return to Page 2-29) Select and enter "ON/OFF"

08 - 01

parameter

CC

08

CC ON

Setting changes from OFF to ON

Note:

If the motor rotating direction is changed, select "OFF" once, and then change the direction. If "OFF" is selected for the pulse motor, it will stop after deceleration, but during the deceleration, ON1 or ON2 is displayed.

2-31

2.3.9

Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test)

(1) Function Performs the test functions below: Maintenance code

Subcode

Display

01

09 CC Check

Performs the operation to adjust the primary charge current.

02

09 DB Check

Performs the operation to adjust the developer bias.

03

09 TC Check

Performs the operation to adjust the transfer current.

04

09 DC Check

Performs the operation to adjust the separator bias.

05

09 LED-H on

Performs the operation to turn on the lamp in the LED head.

06

09 LED-H blink

Performs the operation to blink the lamp in the LED head.

07

09 NIP 5

Performs the prints test pattern 5 (2 by 2 horizontal pattern) to adjust the fixation nip pressure.

08

09 NIP 17

Performs the prints test pattern 17 (solid black) to adjust the fixation nip pressure.

09

09 NIP 20

Performs the prints test pattern 20 (2 by 2 vertical pattern) to adjust the fixation nip pressure.

09

2-32

Function

Refer item

2.3.9 (3)

2.3.9 (4)

2.3.9 (5)

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for selecting the test item 1 If maintenance code 09 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 09, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 09" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation as shown in (3), (4), or (5) on the following pages can be executed.

TEST

"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 DISPLAY"

09

CC

Ch e c k

(To next page)

09

DB

Ch e c k

(To next page)

09

N I P

17

(To page 2-36)

09

N I P

20

(To page 2-36)

2-33

(3) Operation for executing operation to adjust the current voltage This following describes the operation to adjust the current voltage operation taking an example of subcode 01. 1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter the item. The device enters the test mode to adjust the selected item. During the test, the machine displays the message showing the execution of adjustment. 2 After the adjustment, press the [CANCEL] key. The operation stops and the maintenance code 09, subcode01 display comes back. 3 When the [CANCEL] key is not pressed for 3 minutes after the adjustment, the maintenance code 09, subcode 01display comes back.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUBCODE

09

CC

01 DISPLAY"

Che c k

(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous page)

09 - 01 (

CC C h e c k Execu t i on

)

When the

Under testing

key is not pressed for 3

minutes, the test run stops.

09 - 01 (

CC Ch e c k S t op

)

Several seconds later

09 - 01 (

2-34

CC C h e c k End

)

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(4) Operation for executing turning on or blinking in the LED head Subcodes 05 and 06 allow you to respectively turn on and blink the LED head. The procedures with subcode 06 are shown below: 1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter, the LED head starts blinking and the message informing the current status appears on the screen. 2 When 10 seconds passed or the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the LED head stops blinking and the maintenance code 09, subcode 07 display comes back. "MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUBCODE 06 DISPLAY"

09

L ED - H

b l i nk

(Return to page 2-33) (Continued from page 2-33)

09 - 06 L ED - H b l i n k ( Execu t i on ) When the

LED head is blinking. key is not pressed for 10

seconds, the LED head stops blinking.

09 - 06 (

L ED - H S t op

09 - 06 (

Note:

b l i nk )

L ED - H End

bl i nk )

Whether the LED head is lighting or blinking may not be identified depending on the surrounding environment.

2-35

(5) Operation for executing the nip pressure adjustment print Subcodes 07,08, and 09 allow you to print test patterns necessary to adjust the nip pressure of the fixation. Subcode 07 outputs test pattern 5 (2 by 2 horizontal pattern) while Subcode 08 is outputting test pattern 17(solid black). The procedures in case of SUBCODE 07 are shown below: 1 Select the "Paper" parameter. 2 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of paper, the maintenance 09, subcode 10 display come back. 3 Select the paper and press the [ENTER] key, and printout starts. 4 After part of the paper comes out from the fixation, the machine stops unfeeding for about 10 seconds and then the paper is output completely. 5 When the printout is normally finished, the message informing the completion of process appears and the maintenance 09, subcode 07 display comes back. 6 If an error occurs during the process, the error message appears.

09

N I P

"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUB CODE 07 DISPLAY"

5

(Return to page 2-33)

(Continued from page 2-33)

09 - 07

N I P

5

09 - 07

NI P

5

Test pattern 7 is being printed

(

09 - 07

N I P 5 Pr i n t i ng

)

(

09 - 07 N I P 5 P r i n t End

)

Select and confirm the "Paper" parameter from the table shown below. Display

2-36

Description

Manual feed

Roll 1

Roll 2

Roll 3

Normal termination

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) (1) Function This code prints engine test patterns. This code allows you to select and enter the test pattern connected to the subcode, determine the parameters such as print length, and execute printout. Maintenance code

Subcode 01

Display 10 Print 1

Function (test pattern to be printed) Pattern 1: Thick vertical stripes

02

10 Print 2

Pattern 2: Checker

03

10 Print 3

Pattern 3: Thick horizontal stripes

04

10 Print 4

Pattern 4: 1 by 3 horizontal

05

10 Print 5

Pattern 5: 2 by 2 horizontal

06

10 Print 6

Pattern 6: 2 by 14 vertical

07

10 Print 7

Pattern 7: 1- dot line, 64- dot square mesh

08

10 Print 8

Pattern 8: 1-dot mesh

09

10 Print 9

Pattern 9: 2-dot mesh

10

10 Print 10

Pattern 10: 4-dot mesh

11

10 Print 11

Pattern 11: 2 by 2 horizontal, 2-dot shift

10 12

10 Print 12

Pattern 12: (square mesh + black + white)

13

10 Print 13

Pattern 13: (square mesh + scale)

14

10 Print 14

Pattern 14: (square mesh + 1-dot slant line)

15

10 Print 15

Pattern 15: (square mesh + 2-dot slant line)

16

10 Print 16

Pattern 16: (square mesh + 1-dot slant line + 2-dot slant line)

17

10 Print 17

Pattern 17: Solid black

18

10 Print 18

Pattern 18: Solid white

19

10 Print 19

Pattern 19: 1 by 3 vertical

20

10 Print 20

Pattern 20: 2 by 2 vertical

2-37

(2) Operation for selecting the test pattern 1 If the maintenance code 10 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 10, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or test pattern. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 10" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the desired test pattern is selected and entered, the test pattern can be printed as described on the next page.

2-38

PR I NT

"MAINTENANCE CODE 10 DIAPLAY"

10

Pr i n t

1

(To next page)

10

Pr i n t

2

(To next page)

10

Pr i n t

19

(To next page)

10

Pr i n t

20

(To next page)

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(3) Operation for executing the print The following describes the operation for selecting a test pattern and then executing the print, taking an example of subcode 14. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select the "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key. Select the "Print Length" parameter, and press the [ ] key. Set the "Print Count" parameter. If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter selection, the "maintenance code 10, subcode 14" display comes back. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the parameters, and the print will start. If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during printing of multiple sheets, the print terminates and the initial screen comes back. When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial screen comes back. If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed. "MAINTENANCE CODE 10, SUBCODE 14 DISPLAY"

10

P r i n t

14

(Return to previous page)

10 - 14

(Continued from previous page)

P r i n t 14 2 1 0 mm

1

10 - 14 R2N


1

10 - 14 R2N

P r i n t 14 1 6 8 2 mm


During printing

Select "Print Length" parameter

Set "Print Count"

10 - 14 (

Select "Paper" parameter

parameter

P r i n t 14 P r i n t i ng

)

(Terminated in midway)

10 - 14 Pr i n t 14 ( P r i n t End

)

Normal termination of print

2-39

Select the "Paper" parameter from the table below. Display

Description

Manual feed

Roll 1, normal paper

Roll 1, tracing paper

Roll 1, film

Roll 2, normal paper

Roll 2, tracing paper

Roll 2, film

Roll 3, normal paper

Roll 3, tracing paper

Roll 3, film

Select the "Print Length" parameter from the table below. Display

2-40

Description

< 210 mm>

210 mm

(4961 lines)

< 297 mm>

297 mm

(7016 lines)

< 420 mm>

420 mm

(9921 lines)

< 594 mm>

594 mm

(14032 lines)

< 841 mm>

841 mm

(19866 lines)

< 1189 mm>

1189 mm

(28087 lines)

< 1682 mm>

1682 mm = 841 × 2

(39733 lines)

< 2378 mm>

2378 mm = 1189 × 2

(56174 lines)

< 2523 mm>

2523 mm = 841 × 3

(59599 lines)

< 3000 mm>

3000 mm

(70867 lines)

< 4000 mm>

4000 mm

(94489 lines)

< 5000 mm>

5000 mm

(118111 lines)

< 6000 mm>

6000 mm

(141733 lines)

< 7000 mm>

7000 mm

(165356 lines)

< 8000 mm>

8000 mm

(188978 lines)

< 9000 mm>

9000 mm

(212600 lines)

10000 mm

(236222 lines)

< 8.5">

8.5 inch = 215.9 mm

(5100 lines)

< 9" >

9 inch = 228.6 mm

(5400 lines)

< 11" >

11 inch = 279.4 mm

(6600 lines)

< 12" >

12 inch = 304.8 mm

(7200 lines)

< 17" >

17 inch = 431.8 mm

(10200 lines)

< 18" >

18 inch = 457.2 mm

(10800 lines)

< 22" >

22 inch = 558.8 mm

(13200 lines)

< 24" >

24 inch = 609.6 mm

(14400 lines)

< 30" >

30 inch = 762.0 mm

(18000 lines)

< 34" >

34 inch = 863.6 mm

(20400 lines)

< 36" >

36 inch = 914.4 mm

(21600 lines)

< 42" >

42 inch = 1066.8 mm

(25200 lines)

< 44" >

44 inch = 1117.6 mm

(26400 lines)

< 48" >

48 inch = 1219.2 mm

(28800 lines)

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Enter the "Print Sheets" parameter from the table below. Display

Description

< 1>

Prints one test pattern.

< 2>

Prints two test patterns continuously.

:

: Prints 99 test patterns continuously.

2-41

2.3.11 Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment) (1) Function Performs the following adjustments.

Maintenance code

Subcode

Display

Function

Refer to

01

11 Front Regist

Executes printing for adjustment of top edge registration.

2.3.11(3)

02

11 CenterRegist

Executes printing for adjustment of center registration.

2.3.11(4)

03

11 Print Length

Executes printing for adjustment of print length.

2.3.11(5)

04

11 Cut Length

Executes printing for adjustment of cut length.

2.3.11(3)

11

After the "Paper" parameter is selected and entered in each adjustment, NVRAM and RAM values of the engine control parameter are displayed as shown below: 11 - 01

F r on t Reg i s t 220 : 220 "Adjustment" parameter

PAPER parameter

Engine control parameter of

Engine control parameter of NVRAM value

NVRAM value

For the number and description of the engine control parameter to be changed, see Section 2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Engine Control Parameter). For Save method of parameter, see Section 2.3.12 (3) "Changing the parameter value in RAM." For Save method of adjusted parameter, see Section "2.2.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."

2-42

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for selecting adjustment item 1 If maintenance code 11 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the adjustment function of the maintenance code 11, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select a subcode (adjustment function) using [ ] or [ ] key. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 11" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the select adjustment item, the print for adjustment can be executed as shown on the following page.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 DISPLAY"

R EGU L A T E

11

F r on t

11

Cen t e r

11

Pr i n t

11

Cu t

Reg i s t

Reg i s t

Leng t h

Leng t h

(To next page)

(To page 2-47)

(To page 2-49)

(To next page)

2-43

(3) Operation for executing the print to adjust top register or cut length The operating method of subcode 01 (top register adjustment) and subcode 04 (cut length adjustment) is the same. The following describes the operation for executing the print for adjustment, taking an example of subcode 01 (top register adjustment). 1 Select "paper (length, type, width)" parameter, and press the [ ] key. 2 Set the "adjustment" parameter. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter setting, the "maintenance code 11, subcode 01" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed during parameter setting, three-sheet (one-sheet in the case of manual feed) print starts. 5 When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial screen comes back. 6 If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed. "MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 01

11 Fr on t

DISPLAYED"

Reg i s t

(Continued of previous page) (Return to previous page)

11 - 01

F r on t Reg i s t 220 : 220

Select and enter the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter

11 - 01 A - N1

F r on t Reg i s t 220 : < 220> I=

11 - 01 A - N1

F r on t Re g i s t 220 : < 221>

11 - 01

I= Select and enter the "Adjust" parameter

(

F r on t Reg i s t P r i n t i ng )

(

11 - 01 F r on t Reg i s t P r i n t End )

During printing.

2-44

I=

(Terminated in midway)

Normal termination of print.

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Select the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter from the table below: Display

































< SH >

Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Prints three sheets Manual feed

of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of

Description 2523 mm long (print X) A0 width paper roll and normal paper. 2523 mm long (print X) A1 width paper roll and normal paper. 2523 mm long (print X) A2 width paper roll and normal paper. 2523 mm long (print X) A3 width paper roll and normal paper. 2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 2523-mm long (print X) A1-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 2523-mm long (print X) A2-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 2523-mm long (print X) A3-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll film. 2523-mm long (print X) A1-size-in-width roll film. 2523-mm long (print X) A2-size-in-width roll film. 2523-mm long (print X) A3-size-in-width roll film. 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper. 841-mm long (print A) A1-size-in-width roll normal paper. 841-mm long (print A) A2-size-in-width roll normal paper. 841-mm long (print A) A3-size-in-width roll normal paper. 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 841-mm long (print A) A1-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 841-mm long (print A) A2-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 841-mm long (print A) A3-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll film. 841-mm long (print A) A1-size-in-width roll film. 841-mm long (print A) A2-size-in-width roll film. 841-mm long (print A) A3-size-in-width roll film. 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper. 297-mm long (print B) A1-size-in-width roll normal paper. 297-mm long (print B) A2-size-in-width roll normal paper. 297-mm long (print B) A3-size-in-width roll normal paper. 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 297-mm long (print B) A1-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 297-mm long (print B) A2-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 297-mm long (print B) A3-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll film. 297-mm long (print B) A1-size-in-width roll film. 297-mm long (print B) A2-size-in-width roll film. 297-mm long (print B) A3-size-in-width roll film. 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper. 210-mm long (print C) A1-size-in-width roll normal paper. 210-mm long (print C) A2-size-in-width roll normal paper. 210-mm long (print C) A3-size-in-width roll normal paper. 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 210-mm long (print C) A1-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 210-mm long (print C) A2-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 210-mm long (print C) A3-size-in-width roll tracing paper. 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll film. 210-mm long (print C) A1-size-in-width roll film. 210-mm long (print C) A2-size-in-width roll film. 210-mm long (print C) A3-size-in-width roll film. 210-mm long (print C) A1-size-in-width roll film.

2-45

For Subcode 04 (adjustment of cut length), the manual loading, , cannot be selected. The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed . That is: When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used. When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the roll 2 drawer should be used. Note:

Be sure to load the paper whose type and width agree with those selected with the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter.

Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale). Hint:

2-46

For description of the ADJUST parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," "see Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(4) Operation for executing the print to center register adjustment The operating method of subcode 02 (center register adjustment). 1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key. 2 Set the "adjustment" parameter. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter setting, the "maintenance code 11, subcode 02" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed during parameter setting, three-sheet (one-sheet in the case of manual feed) print starts. 5 When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial screen comes back. 6 If an error occurs during the process, the error message appears. 11

"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 02 DISPLAY"

Ce n t e r Reg i s t

(Continued from page 2-43) (Return to page 2-43)

11 - 02

Cen t e r Reg i s t 50 : 50

11 - 02 R1

Cen t e r Reg i s t 50 : < 50>

,

11 - 02 R1

,

printing.

11 - 02 (

"Paper" parameter

,

Ce n t e r Reg i s t 50 : < 49>

During

Select and enter the

Select and enter the "Adjust" parameter

Cen t e r Reg i s t P r i n t i ng )

(Terminated in midway)

(

11 - 0 2 Ce n t e r Reg i s t P r i n t End )

Normal termination of print.

2-47

Select the PAPER parameter from the list shown below: Display

Description

< R1 >

Roll 1.

< R2 >

Roll 2.

< R3 >

Roll 3.

< SH >

Manual feed

Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale) sheet in normal 420 mm long (9921 lines) paper.

Hint:

2-48

For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(5) Operation for executing the print to plotting length adjustment The operating method of subcode 03 (plotting length adjustment). 1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key. 2 Set the "adjustment" parameter. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter setting, the "maintenance code 11, subcode 03" display comes back. 4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed during parameter setting, three-sheet (one-sheet in the case of manual feed) print starts. 5 When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial screen comes back. 6 If an error occurs during the process, the error message appears.

11

P r i n t

"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 03 DISPLAY"

Leng t h

(Continue of page 2-43) (Return to page 2-43 )

11 - 03

P r i n t Leng t h 1923 : 1923

11 - 03 Ro - X

P r i n t Leng t h 1923 :

I= 11 - 03 Ro - X

I=

printing.

11 - 03 (

"Paper" parameter

I=

Pr i n t Leng t h 1923 :

During

Select and enter the

Select and enter the "Adjust" parameter

P r i n t Leng t h P r i n t i ng )

(Terminated in midway)

(

11 - 03 P r i n t Leng t h P r i n t End )

Normal termination of print.

2-49

Select and enter the “Paper” parameter from the table below: Display

Description

210 mm long (print C) roll paper (tracing paper).

210 mm long (print C) roll paper (tracing paper).

2523 mm long (print X) roll paper.

841 mm long (print A) roll paper.

297 mm long (print B) roll paper.

210 mm long (print C) roll paper (plain paper).

< SH >

Manual feed

The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed . That is: When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used. When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the roll 2 drawer should be used. The normal paper is used and three sheets of test pattern 13 (mesh + scale) are printed. Hint:

2-50

For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see "Section 2.3.12 Engine control parameter." For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) (1) Function This code changes RAM values of engine control parameters. Maintenance code

Subcode 101 102 :

12

Function

12 200 200 12

Changes the RAM value of engine control parameter 101.

50 50

Changes the RAM value of engine control parameter 102.

:

863 -

Display

12

: 0 0

Changes the RAM value of engine control parameter 863.

12

(If non operable number is specified, no value is displayed.)

RAM and NVRAM values of the engine control parameter are displayed on second and first lines, respectively.

12 - 601


Subcode (engine control parameter number)

RAM value of engine control parameter 601

NVRAM value of engine control parameter 601

Immediately after the device is turned on, the engine control parameter is copied from NVRAM to RAM. Therefore, if the value saved in RAM has not been changed after powering on, the same value appears on both first and second lines. Numbers for the operable engine parameters are as follows: 101 to 154, 201 to 263, 301 to 363, 401 to 463, 701 to 763, and 801 to 863 Parameters with any other numbers are not operable. Note that values for numbers 155 to 163, 501 to 563, are indefinite. Note:

Even when the specified parameter is operable, it must not be changed unreasonably provided that it is not listed in the engine control parameter lists described on next pages.

Hint:

For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving parameter."

2-51

The print length of the paper roll determines the print category as table below. (The length of the boundary may be changed.) Print category

Print length

Typical length

Print X

28801 lines (approx. 1219 mm, approx. 48.002 inches) or more

1682, 2378, 2523 mm etc.

Print A

9874 lines (approx. 418 mm, approx. 16.457 inches) to 59055 lines

420, 594, 841, 1189, mm 17, 18, 24, 36, 48 inches

Print B

6614 lines (approx. 280 mm, approx. 11.023 inches) to 9873 lines

297 mm 12 inches

Print C

4961 lines (approx. 210 mm, approx. 8.268 inches) to 6613 lines

210 mm 9, 11 inches

When incrementing the top edge registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shifted toward the direction opposite to the paper feed direction. When incrementing the center registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shifted to the left. When incrementing the plotting length adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shortened in the papear feed direction. When incrementing the cut length adjustment value, the cut length of the paper roll is shortened.

2-52

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (1/4) Engine control parameter No.

Description

PAPER parameter

Standard value

Input range

Unit of input

601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612

Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film, A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

X-N0 X-N1 X-N2 X-N3 X-T0 X-T1 X-T2 X-T3 X-F0 X-F1 X-F2 X-F3

430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430

613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624

Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film, A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

A-N0 A-N1 A-N2 A-N3 A-T0 A-T1 A-T2 A-T3 A-F0 A-F1 A-F2 A-F3

430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430

Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film, A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

B-N0 B-N1 B-N2 B-N3 B-T0 B-T1 B-T2 B-T3 B-F0 B-F1 B-F2 B-F3

400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648

Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film, A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

C-N0 C-N1 C-N2 C-N3 C-T0 C-T1 C-T2 C-T3 C-F0 C-F1 C-F2 C-F3

400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

649

Manual feed paper

SH

430

658

Waste toner bottle (Set 1 when the large capacity waste toner bottle is installed.)

-

0

0, 1

0: Strike bottle 1: Does not strike bottle

659

Type of process cartridge

-

2

0, 2

0: New type (Type 2) 2: Old type

662

Process cartridge consumption over warning

-

1

0, 1

1: Warns. 0: Does not warn.

663

Front clip amount

-

71

0-255

625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636

Top edge registration adjustment value

Standard value: ± 100

(300-500) To front To rear

1 msec (equivalent to 0.8 mm) Reference: 1 mm=12.5 4 mm=50 8 mm=100

1 line Reference 3 mm=71

2-53

Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (2/4) Engine control parameter No. 701 702 703

Center registration adjustment value

704

Standard value

Roll 1

R1

50

Roll 2

R2

50

Roll 3

R3

50

Manual feed paper

R4

50

708

Head A turn-on delay time

Head A (right side)

16

709

Head C turn-on delay time

Head C (left side)

16

710

Line memory write start bank

711

94

Input range

Unit of input

0-100 To light To left

8 dots (equivalent to 0.338666 mm) (equivalent to 0.01233 inches) [Reference] 1 mm=2.95

0-65

90

87-93

Head B (center)

0

Fixed to 0

713

Head C (left side)

90

87-93

718

Paper roll (tracing paper), print C

RT-C

1895

719

Paper roll (film), print C

RF-C

1895

Paper roll, print X

Ro-X

1915

Paper roll, print A

Ro-A

1915

722

Paper roll, print B

Ro-B

1909

723

Paper roll (plain paper), print C

Ro-C

1985

724

Manual feed paper

SH

1915

Line memory read start bank

720 721

728

Plotting length accuracy adjustment value

Time conversion value of line quantity [line/sec]

731

1915

Head A (right side)

29

Head B (center)

29

733

Head C (left side)

29

734

Head A (right side)

5

Head B (center)

5

732

735

Strobe width

Strobe width step

736

Head C (left side)

5

737

Head A (right side)

2

Head B (center)

2

Head C (left side)

2

738 739

Strobe width step 2 (fine adjustment per drawing)

8 µsec

Fixed to 94

Head A (right side)

712

2-54

PAPER parameter

Description

1910 to 1936 Increased Reduced 1 Hz

1910-1936

1 line

15-39 0.0833 µsec 2-8

1-6

0.0833 µsec

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Table 2-4 List of Engine Control Parameters (3/4)

Engine control parameter No.

Roll paper parameter

Description Print X Tracing paper

Standard value

A0 width equivalent roll paper

5940

741

A1 width equivalent roll paper

5930

742

A2 width equivalent roll paper

5920

743

A3 width equivalent roll paper

5910

A0 width equivalent roll paper

5940

745

A1 width equivalent roll paper

5930

746

A2 width equivalent roll paper

5920

747

A3 width equivalent roll paper

5910

A0 width equivalent roll paper

5940

A1 width equivalent roll paper

5930

740

Print X Normal paper

744

Print A, B, C Normal paper

748 749 750

Heat roller speed adjustment value

A2 width equivalent roll paper

-

5920

A3 width equivalent roll paper

5910

A0 width equivalent roll paper

5900

753

A1 width equivalent roll paper

5890

754

A2 width equivalent roll paper

5880

755

A3 width equivalent roll paper

5870

A0 width equivalent roll paper

5940

757

A1 width equivalent roll paper

5930

758

A2 width equivalent roll paper

5920

759

A3 width equivalent roll paper

5910

751 Print A, B, C Tracing paper

752

Print X, A, B, C Film

756

Manual feed paper

760

762

Heat roller intermittent rotation Mode 0: "59 seconds stop and 1 second rotatation" are repeated. Mode 3: For 3 minutes alone immediately after printing "10 seconds stop and 10 seconds rotation" are repeated and after that "5959 seconds stop and 1 second rotation" are repeated.

Hint:

Input range

Standard value +/-50 - Faster + Slower

Unit of input value 1

Changing 10 increments or decrements the speed by 0.14 mm/sec

5930

-

0

0, 3

0: Mode 0 3: Mode 3

No.762 is effective from the engine version F/W version (2.20) and after No. 658, 861 and 862 are effective from the engine F/W version (2.30) and after

2-55

Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (4/4) Engine control parameter No.

PAPER parameter

Standard value

801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812

Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film ,A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

X-N0 X-N1 X-N2 X-N3 X-T0 X-T1 X-T2 X-T3 X-F0 X-F1 X-F2 X-F3

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824

Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film ,A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

A-N0 A-N1 A-N2 A-N3 A-T0 A-T1 A-T2 A-T3 A-F0 A-F1 A-F2 A-F3

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film ,A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

B-N0 B-N1 B-N2 B-N3 B-T0 B-T1 B-T2 B-T3 B-F0 B-F1 B-F2 B-F3

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll normal paper, A1 width paper roll normal paper, A2 width paper roll normal paper, A3 width paper roll tracing paper, A0 width paper roll tracing paper, A1 width paper roll tracing paper, A2 width paper roll tracing paper, A3 width paper roll film, A0 width paper roll film, A1 width paper roll film ,A2 width paper roll film, A3 width paper roll

C-N0 C-N1 C-N2 C-N3 C-T0 C-T1 C-T2 C-T3 C-F0 C-F1 C-F2 C-F3

300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300

825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848

Cut length adjustment value

Input range

Unit of input

Standard value ± 200 (100 to 500) longer shorter

1 line (equivalent to 0.042333 mm) (equivalent to 0.001667 inches) Reference: 1 mm=23.62 4.23 mm=100 8.47 mm=200 0.1667 inches=100 0.5 inches=300 1.0 inches=600

850

Rear edge margin for print X (When the margin is ensured, the cut length of the paper roll will be increased by that margin.)

-

0

0-4500

1 line Reference 120 mm=2835 4.725 inches

861

How to stop the slitter cutter motor

-

0

0, 1

0: Without brake 1: With brake

0, 1

0: [m] Display in meter 1: [ft] Display in feet

862

2-56

Description

Switching between the display in meter and feet

-

0

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for selecting the parameter number 1 If maintenance code 12 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 12, subcode 601 is displayed initially. 2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or engine control parameter number. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 12" display comes back. 4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and entered the parameter, the RAM value of the specified engine control parameter can be changed. 5 If non operable parameter number is specified, the [ENTER] key is inactive.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 12 DISPLAY"

P A R AME T E R

12

430 430

(To next page)

12

430 430

(To next page)

,

,   

12

,

The ENTER key is inactive.

12

The ENTER key is inactive.

2-57

(3) Operation for changing the parameter of the RAM value Indicate the change operation engine control parameter of the RAM value. In the example shown below, you should change the RAM value of parameter number 602 from 430 to 420. 1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the RAM value on the second line is marked with angle brackets. 2 Press the [ ] key to move the underscore to the left (digit). 3 Press the [ ] key to reduce "3" marked with the underscore to "2." 4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed (set and entered), the RAM value is changed and the maintenance code12, subcode 602 display come back. 5 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing the RAM value.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 12 SUBCODE

12

4 30 4 30

602 DISPLAYED"

(Continued from previous page) (Return to previous page )

12 - 602


(Move the underscore to the adjacent left digit)

12 - 602


(Reduce "3" to "2")

12 - 602


12

4 30 4 20

Change the RAM value (NVRAM value is not changed)

For the save method of parameter used to make the NVRAM value identical to the RAM value, see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."

2-58

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

2.3.13 Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM) (1) Function Operates the NVRAM value of engine control parameter. Maintenance Subcode code

Display

Function

Refer item

01

13 RAM——>NVRAM Save Parameter

Saves RAM values of engine control parameters to NVRAM.

2.3.13 (3)

02

13 ROM——>NNVRAM Parameter Initialize

Initializes RAM values of engine control parameters

2.3.13 (4)

13

(2) Operation for selecting the NVRAM operation 1 If maintenance code 13 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 13, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 13" display comes back. 4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and enter the operation for NVRAM, you can execute the operation.

NVR AM

"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 DISPLAY"

1 3 < 0 1 > R AM > N V R AM S a v e P a r ame t e r

(To next page)

13 R O M  > NV R A M P a r ame t e r I n i t i a l i z e

(To page 2.61)

2-59

(3) Operation for saving the parameter This following describes operation to save the RAM value of an engine control parameter to NVRAM after it is changed with maintenance code 11 or 12. The value saved to NVRAM will be loaded to RAM when the device is turned on. 1 Select and enter subcode 01, the confirmation message appears to ask if you really want to save the engine control parameter. 2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed in response to the message, the RAM value of the engine control parameter is saved to NVRAM. 3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the RAM value is not saved to NVRAM.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 SUBCODE 01 DISPLAY"

1 3 < 0 1 > R A M > N V R A M Sa v e P a r ame t e r (Return to previous page)

13 (

(

(Continued from previous page)

R A M > N V R A M S a v e OK ? )

1 3 < 0 1 > R A M > N V R A M S a v e En d )

The display appears 2 to 3 seconds after

2-60

The RAM value is saved to NVRAM

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(4) Operation for initializing the NAVRAM This following describes operation to reset the NVRAM value of the engine control parameter to the default (ROM value). 1 Select and enter subcode 02, the confirmation message appears. 2 When the ENTER key is pressed in response to the message, the NVRAM value of the engine control parameter is reset to the ROM value. 3 When the CANCEL key is pressed, the NVRAM value is not reset.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 SUBCODE 02 DISPLAY"

1 3 < 0 2 > R O M > N V R A M P a r ame t e r I n i t i a l i z e (Return to page 2-59)

(

(Continued from page 2-58)

13 - 02 R OM > N V R A M I n i t i a l i z e OK ? )

(

1 3 < 0 2 > ROM > N V R AM I n i t i a l i z e End )

The display appears 2 to 3 seconds after

The NVRAM value is reset to the default (ROM value)

Since defaults are optimal to each engine firmware version, some of them may differ from the standard values shown on the engine control parameter lists.

2-61

2.3.14 Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER" (User-defined engine parameter) (1) Function Change the user-defined engine parameters. Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode. The change will not affect the controller settings. Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default. Maintenance code

Subcode 01 02

14

03 04 05

2-62

Display 14 Densit NORMAL :3 14 Power Save OFF :0 14 D.Open Cut OFF :0 14 E.Cut Timer OFF :0 14 T-paper mode MODE1 :1

Function Displays and changes the "print density." Displays and changes the "power save set." Displays and changes the "door open cut." Displays and changes the "top edge cut timer." Displays and changes the "tracing paper mode."

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for selecting the user-defined engine parameter 1 If maintenance code 14 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 14, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select the user-defined engine parameter using [ ] or [ ] key. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 14" display comes back. 4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, you can change the specified user defined engine parameter.

< 1 4 >USER

"MAINTENANCE CODE 14 DISPLAY"

P A RAM

14

Den s i t y NORMA L

(To next page)

:3

14

Powe r

Save OFF : 0

(To next page)

14

E . Cu t

T i me r OFF : 0

(To next page)

14

T - p a p e r mo d e MO D E 1 : 1

(To next page)

2-63

(3) Operation for changing the user-defined engine parameter This following describes operation to change the user-defined engine parameter. In the example shown below, you should change "Density" from "Normal" to "Thick" (subcode 01). 1 After the desired parameter is select and entered, the parameter value on the second line is marked with angle brackets. 2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance code 14, subcode 01display comes back. 3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing the parameter.

14

Den s i t y NORMA L

"MAINTENANCE CODE 14 DISPLAYED"

: 3 (Continued from previous page)

(Return to previous page)

14 - 01


14 - 01 Den s i t y

14 - 01


Den s i t y TH I CK

14 - 01

Den s i t y TH I CK

Change the print density to thick.

2-64

:5

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Select user-defined engine control parameter values from the table below: "Print density" setting


< RATHER THIN :2>





Description 1: Thin 2: Slightly thin 3: Normal 4: Slightly thick 5: Thick

"Power Save" setting


(Default)

Description 0: Does not enter the power save mode.

(Default)

1: Enters the level 1 power save mode after 15 minutes.

2: Enters the level 1 power save mode after 30 minutes.

3: Enters the level 1 power save mode after 60 minutes.

0: Off (The edge cut is not executed.)

< 30min :1>

1: 30 minutes

< 60min :2>

2: 60 minutes (1 hour)

3: 120 minutes (2 hours)

4: 240 minutes (4 hours)

< 1min :5>

5: Approx. 1 minute

< 5min :6>

6: 5 minutes

< 10min :7>

7: 10 minutes

"Tracing paper Mode" setting

(Default)

Description

1: Mode 1

2: Mode 2

(Default)

2-65

2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width) (1) Function Change the print width of roll paper. Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode. The change will not affect the controller settings. Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.

Maintenance code

Subcode

Display

01

15 A0-Roll 841mm

02

15 A1-Roll 594mm

03

15 A2-Roll 420mm

04

15 A3-Roll 297mm

15

2-66

Function Displays and changes width that is judged to paper width. Displays and changes width that is judged to paper width. Displays and changes width that is judged to paper width. Displays and changes width that is judged to paper width.

the paper roll print be equivalent to A0 the paper roll print be equivalent to A1 the paper roll print be equivalent to A2 the paper roll print be equivalent to A3

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for selecting the paper roll print width 1 If maintenance code 15 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 15, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Select the roll width using [ ] or [ ] key. 3 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the user defin engine parameter. 4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, the print width can be changed.

RO L L

"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 DISPLAY"

WI DTH

15

A0 - Ro l l 8 4 1 mm

(To next page)

15

A1 - Ro l l 5 9 4 mm

(To next page)

15

A2 - Ro l l 4 2 0 mm

(To next page)

15

A3 - Ro l l 2 9 7 mm

(To next page)

2-67

(3) Operation for changing the paper roll print width This following describes operation to change for print width of the paper roll. In the example shown below, you should change the print width of the paper roll, which is judged to be equivalent to subcode 01 and A0 paper width, from "841 mm" to "36 inch."

1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the parameter value on the second line is marked with angle brackets. 2 Press the [ ] or [ ] key until "36 inch" appears on the display. 3 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance code15, subcode 01 display comes back. 4 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing the parameter value. "MAINTENANCE CODE 15 SUBCODE

15

01 DISPLAY"

A0 - Ro l l 8 4 1 mm

(Continued from previous page) (Return to previous page)

15 - 01

A0 - Ro l l < 8 4 1 mm >

15 - 01

A0 - Ro l l < 8 8 0 mm > ,

15 - 01

Indicate the default.

,˙˙˙

A0 - Ro l l < 36 ”

>

15 - 01

A0 - Ro l l 36 ”

Change the "841 mm" to "36 inch."

2-68

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

Select the print width of the paper roll from the table below: A0 width equivalent paper roll

Meaning of value

< 841mm>

841 mm: A0 width

< 880mm>

880 mm

< 900mm>

900 mm

< 910mm>

910 mm

< 914mm>

914 mm

< 30 " >

30 inch = 762.0 mm

< 34 " >

34 inch = 863.6 mm

< 36 " >

36 inch = 914.4 mm

A1 width equivalent paper roll

(default)

Meaning of value

< 594mm>

594 mm :A1 width

< 610mm>

610 mm

< 620mm>

620 mm

< 700mm>

700 mm

< 707mm>

707 mm

< 22 " >

22 inch = 558.8 mm

< 24 " >

24 inch = 609.6 mm

A3 width equivalent paper roll

(default)

Meaning of value

< 297mm>

297 mm :A3 width

< 310mm>

310 mm

< 11 " >

11 inch = 279.4 mm

< 12 " >

12 inch = 304.8 mm

A3 width equivalent paper roll

(default)

Meaning of value

< 297mm>

297 mm :A3 width

< 310mm>

310 mm

< 11 " >

11 inch = 279.4 mm

< 12 " >

12 inch = 304.8 mm

(default)

2-69

2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG" (Process Cartridge Consumption Log) (1) Function This code displays the information on up to ten latest process cartridges replaced in the past.

Maintenance Subcode code 01 02 16

: 10

Display 16[0002] 03-06(09:30) 120 16[0001] 03-05(18:32) 5400m : 16[

Function Displays the latest process cartridge information. Displays the second latest process cartridge information. : Displays the tenth latest process cartridge information. (If there is no information, the error code is left blank.)

]

The process cartridge information is displayed as follows:

Process cartridge number

16 [ 0002 ] 03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 )

Final application date and time Month/day, hour/minute (March 6, 9H30M)

2-70

1 2 0m

Process cartridge consumption [Distance] (120 m)

Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode

(2) Operation for displaying the process cartridge consumption log 1 If maintenance code 16 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter the Maintenance Code," the process cartridge information of the maintenance code 16, subcode 01 is displayed initially. 2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select desired subcodes to display and check settings one after another. 3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 16" display comes back.

P ROCE S S

L OG

"MAINTENANCE CODE16 DISPLAY"

16 [ 0002 ] 03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 )

1 2 0m

16 [ 0001 ] 03 - 05 ( 18 : 32 )

5 4 0 0m

16 [

]

16 [

]

2-71

2.4

Message The table below lists the messages displayed on the second line of the LCD during operations on the device such as printing, and their meanings. Message (

Warming up 12345

)

(

Printing

)

During printing

(

Print End

)

The printout is normally terminated.

(

Print Stop

)

The machine is executing the print stop process.

(

Execution

)

The machine is executing the operation.

(

End

)

The operation is completed.

(

Stop

)

The machine is executing the operation stop process.

(

Door Open

)

The door is opened.

(

Door8 Open

)

Door 8 (manual paper feed holder) is opened. (When manual feed is not used, door 8 must be closed.)

(

Toner Empty

)

The toner is run out.

(

TonerDoor Open

)

The toner inner door is opened.

(

WT-Bottle Full

)

The waste toner bottle is filled.

(

WT-Bottle Off

)

The waste toner bottle is not mounted.

(

Process Off

)

The process cartridge is not mounted.

(

Paper End

)

(

Paper JAM [3400]

)

(

ERROR [2038]

)

Message

2-72

Description The machine is warming up. The figure is a countdown time.

The paper is run out. Paper jam occurred, (The figure in the brackets is error code. ) Unrecoverable error occurred. (The figure in the brackets is error code.

Description

(

Set date&time!

)

NVRAM is not initialized. (The time is also not set.) The initialized pattern is rewritten.

(

SW4 DIPSW-1:ON

)

Bit 1 of the 8-bit DIP switch (SW5) is set to the ON position.

Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode

Chapter 3

Maintenance Person Mode

This device supports the maintenance person mode that cannot be defined by users. Chapter 3 describes functions and operations of those menus specific to maintenance people. To access and use this mode, you must enter the password.

3.1

Enter to Maintenance Person Mode

Data wait display

1 Press the

PR I NT

READY

key to activate the offline mode.

Setup display

MENU # SETUP

2 Press the keys in the following order.

P A S S WO R D I N P U T MO D E 3 Enter the password by pressing the keys in the following order.

The display appears as shown right

I NPUT LEVEL

OK 003

and the display enters the maintenance person mode.

MENU # SETUP The above operating sequence is the same as user-defined menus. When the setup is completed key is pressed to return to the data prompt display, the maintenance person mode is and the automatically quitted.

3-1

3.2

Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus

Maintenance person's special menu supports 16 options as shown below. (1) - (3) are the menu options in the function menus, (4) - (14) are that of the system menus, and (15) and (16) are that of the device menu. HINT: The parameter marked with underscore (_) is a factory default. (1) HDD FORMAT (FUNCTION) Function:

Performs the formats of internal hard disk.

(2) NVRAM FORMAT (FUNCTION) Function:

Performs the formats of NVRAM.

(3) VERSION UPGRADE (FUNCTION) Function:

Performs version upgrading of the system firmware using the maintenance CF card.

(4) FACTORY SET (SYSTEM) Function:

Initializes the parameter of user defined item. However, the device serial number is not initialized.

(5) SERIAL NO (SYSTEM) Function: Parameter:

Enter the serial number of the plotter. 00000 to 65535 (decimal number)

(6) CUSTOM (POINT PLOT) (SYSTEM - SYSTEM CUSTOM) Function:

This parameter determines whether "POINT PLOT" will be displayed with the HPGL format parameter. Parameter: OFF: Not display ON: Display Supplementary explanation: Selecting "ON" for this setting allows modifying setting of the following parameters with HPGL format parameters. Designation: POINT PLOT ON: A single point is plotted. (Default) OFF: A single point is not plotted. (7) SNMP TRAP NUM. (SYSTEM - COMM.- PARAM. - ETHRNET - DETAIL ITEM)

3-2

Function:

Specifies the number of SNMP TRAP tables. The TRAP table refers to the

Parameter:

table accessed from "TRAPnn Manager" to "TRAPnn: PORT." 1 to 20 (Default: 2)

Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode

(8) ALTERNATIVE INTERFACE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - USB) Function:

This parameter enables or disables the alternative setup for the USB interface. The default setting is OFF. This parameter is used together with SIIT's PC driver. When the user does not want to use SIIT's driver and desires to establish IEEE1284-compatible communications controlled under the printer device class, which is defined according to the USB interface, you should select ALTERNATIVE INTERFACE.

Parameter :

OFF : Invalid ON : Valid

(9) TIMING MODE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL) Function: Setting:

Specifies the parallel interface communication conditions (signal timing). NORMAL FAST SLOW MANUAL (Displayed the maintenance person defined level mode.)

(10) ACK ON TIME (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL) Function: Parameter:

Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE on time. 1 to 127 (Default: 80)

(11) ACK PULSE (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COM PARAMETER - PARALLEL) Function: Setting:

Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE pulse width. 1 to 127 (Default: 80)

(12) BUSY OFF TIMING (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL) Function: Parameter:

Specifies BUSY signal off timing. ACK FALL EDGE ACK RISE EDGE

(13) SELECT SIGNAL (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL) Function: Parameter:

Specifies whether the SELECT signal is turned on or off. ON: Always turned on (active). OFF/ON: The setting varies depending on whether the device is in online or offline state.

(14) AF SIGNAL DIR. (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL) Function: Parameter:

Specifies AF (auto feed) signal direction. INPUT: The AF signal is handled as input. OUTPUT: The AF signal is handled as output.

3-3

(15) Special setting 2 (Device) Function Parameters

Used from the Web when adjusting the scanner. 00 - FF Default value: 00

(16) Special setting 3 (Device) Function

Parameter

3-4

Selects whether an error of H/W on MRC2 board (PES under run error) is to detected or not. (This parameter should normally be set to OFF) OFF: Does not detect the error ON: Detects the error

Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode

3.3

How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web

1 See the "remote control startup procedure" in the User's Guide and display the plotter's web screen. 2 Enter password CSCCSUDR (8 upper case characters in half-size) to the password input area of the menu on the left side of the page and then click [Login].

3.4

Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions

If a trouble occurred at a user, using the "Maintenance Information Acquisition" function allows collecting the information necessary to locate the cause of a controller error.

1 Log in the maintenance person mode of the Web 2 Click "Maintenance" on the left side of the page to display the maintenance page. 3 Click "3. Maintenance Information" on the "Maintenance " page to display the "Special maintenance" page. 4 Click [Upload] to save the information file to PC.

5 Return to the "Maintenance" page and click "5. All Ports and PDL Parameters Import/Export" to display the "Ports & PDL Import/Export" page for All ports and All PDL setting. 6 Click [Export] to save the setup file to PC. 7 When above operations were implemented from a user's PC, finally enter "logout" in the password field of the menu and click [Login]. Make sure the display above the password field is changed to Level: "user".

3-5

Chapter 4 Regular Inspection

Chapter 4

Regular Inspection

This chapter describes regular inspection and maintenance.

4-1

4.1

Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure

The regular inspection must be executed every 12 months, as a rule. On the other hand, 6 month interval is recommended for the preventive maintenance that is necessary to maintain the acceptable image quality. Table 4-1 below lists regular inspection items and procedures. Note: Before replacing a part, be sure to contact the user and obtain his/her approval. Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List (1 / 2) No.

Item

Cleaning Replacement*

Refer to

Operation check of single plotter

Execute "MENU PRINT" in the function menu to check

——

——

User's manual

2

Check the plotting specifications and image quality

Enter the engine maintenance mode and output engine test patterns to check and evaluate the specifications and quality. (Test pattern) No.15 (Paper feed position) Upper and lower ports (Paper size) All sizes (Number of outputs) 1 sheet, each

——

——

2.2.10

3

Inspection of gas spring

When the spring has reached the end of service life (the replacement timing is indicated on the warning label (see page v)), replace the part.

——

——

8.2.35

4

Cleaning of SLA

Clean the SLA (LED head lens) with a cotton cloth.

5 km

——

——

5

Dampen a rag with water and wring it Cleaning of roller (1) and rollers on sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on each roller both sides of head surface.

5 km

150 km

——

6

Cleaning of charge wires (2) and (3).

Use cotton seagull soused in ethanol (ethyl alcohol) for the cleaning.

5 km

20 km (Wire)

——

7

Cleaning of DEV seat

Wipe the toner off the DEV seat with a dry cotton cloth.

5 km

——

——

8

Cleaning of bottom foretranscription guide

Dampen a rag with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on the bottom fore-transcription guide.

5 km

——

——

9

If the parts are heavily soiled, dampen a rag with Cleaning of pinch and registration water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the rollers, cutaway rollers, pinch roller toner and paper chips off on each roller surface. ASSY. After the cleaning, dry the parts completely.

10 km

——

——

10

Check of replacement timing of developer unit

——

100 km

——

5 km

100 km

——

When the toner has been spilled out, wipe off the toner.

5 km

100 km

——

When the cover is heavily soiled, clean the inside wall with a vacuum cleaner.

5 km

——

——

When the rollers are heavily soiled, dampen a rag with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe each roller surface. After the cleaning, dry the parts completely. Execute the cleaning for both upper and lower stages of the paper feed unit.

10 km

——

——

1

11 Cleaning of DV spacer

12

Cleaning the seats of magnet rolls R and L

13 Cleaning of DEVT cover

14

4-2

Operation

Cleaning of paper feed, remaining, and rewind rollers

When the developer unit has reached the end of service life, replace the part. When the spacer is heavily soiled, wipe it with a dry cloth while turning the roller. Note: Do not touch the magnet roller with bare hands.

Chapter 4 Regular Inspection

Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List (2 / 2) No.

Item

Operation

Cleaning

Replacement*

Refer to

10 km

——

——

10 km

100 km

——

5 km

100 km

——

5 km

100 km

——

5 km

100 km

——

Open the rear cover and remove paper chips. 15 Cleaning of slitter cutter

16

Cleaning of out fuser separation finger

Inspection of fuser thermistors 17 (TH01, TH02, TH04)

Cleaning of heat and backup 18 rollers

Note: Be careful that you will not be injured by the cutter blade. When the ends of the separation finger are heavily soiled by the toner, wipe it off with a rag. When the parts have reached the end of service life, replace them. Note: Pay attention not to bend the leaf spring fixed. Dampen a cotton cloth with heat roller cleaner and wipe each roller surface. Note: Wipe the cleaned surfaces with a dry cloth. Check the mount condition.

*

**

19

Check of belt (TRANS)

20

Confirmation of user's operating environment

Check whether the user has used the device under the specified operating conditions, including temperature and humidity.

——

——

——

21

Confirmation of consumable parts

Check whether the user is using the consumable parts specified by Seiko I Infotech.

——

——

——

Note: Pay attention not to break the arm of PS06 for the belt

Figures in this column are only criteria. The replacement timing depends on the actual operating environment and cleaning intervals. You can see cleaning and replacement intervals, using maintenance code 02 and 03 in the engine criteria maintenance mode (see Sections 2.3.2 and 2.3.3). Before restarting the device after the completion of necessary inspections, clean the interior of the machine.

4-3

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

This chapter describes troubleshooting where an error occurred in the controller. If a trouble occurs on the device, the error lamp is turned on. (In case of warning, the lamp is not lit.) In addition, an error message appears on the LCD. When the error message is displayed, find the cause and place and remove the trouble. If the error message is not displayed, judge the place based on the symptom and remove the trouble. Classified errors and codes supported errors are identified by 4-digit hexadecimal numbers (example: E E56E-01FF).

5.1

Type of Error Messages

Error messages are classified into four categories as shown below according to the type of trouble. (1) Operator call error This error message shows troubles that the operator can handle: for example, replacement of consumables. Operator call errors are further classified into errors that the operator can handle and those that our Service Center must handle. (2) Operator report warning This error message is the warning information addressed to the operator: for example, replacement of consumables is oncoming. (3) Warning This error message shows incomplete system environment or setup: for example, communication error or faulty data. (4) Service call error This error message shows troubles that are attributable to defective parts, faulty media, or program error, and must be handled by our Service Center.

5-1

5.2

Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error

"Operator call errors" can be handled by the operator. When this type of error occurs, you should request the user to troubleshoot the machine based on the error message displayed. If the same symptom recurs frequently, you should remove the trouble according to the instructions described in "Chapter 6 Maintenance Person." (For detailed descriptions on troubles relating to door open / close and consumables, see the user's guide.)

CLOSE

DOOR

1

Description:

The roll 1 drawer is opened.

Measure:

Close the roll 1 drawer.

CLOSE

DOOR

2

Description:

The roll 2 drawer is opened. (For 2- or 3-tray model)

Measure:

Close the roll 2 drawer.

CLOSE

DOOR

3

Description:

The roll 3 drawer is opened (For 3-tray model).

Measure:

Close the roll 3 drawer. O P E N DOOR X , X R E MO V E P A P E R

OP E N DOOR X R EMO V E P A P E R One door is displayed

Two or more doors are displayed

Description:

The paper is jammed in the machine.

Measure:

Troubleshoot the machine according to the guidance displayed.

S E T U P I S WR O N G # I N I T I AL SET Description:

The machine detects the damaged setup area checksum after powering on.

Measure:

Press

key to display the default setting selection screen.

Using

,

E

5-2

SET

THE

and

, select and execute the type of the default setting.

S / N

Description:

This error message may appear if the serial number at powering on is not specified.

Measure:

Specify the serial number of the device. (see Section 5.10 Serial Number Not Set.)

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.3

Operator Notice Warning

W S P OO L J O B WA S

I N I T I A L I ZED DE L ETED

Description:

The saved job has been damaged, and thus the spool area is initialized (When HDD is installed).

Measure:

After 3 seconds, the message changes to "WAIT A MOMENT" and then the device starts.

W

J O B WA S

DE L ETED

Description:

The data is received in the format not supported by the device, and thus the data was ignored.

Measure:

Use the data received in the format supported by this device.

W S P OO L

ERROR

Description:

The spool area on the HDD has been damaged, and thus the memory spool area is used (When HDD is installed).

Measure:

Replace the HDD

W N VRAM Description:

Measure:

ERROR The nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 Board) is damaged. Usual printing is executable while some functions do not work correctly. Currently, only the accounting information printout function in the function menu is affected by this error. Execute NVRAM format in the function menu. If the error is not removed, replace the MRC2 board.

D E L E T E J OB ? Y = ENT ER N= CANCE L Description:

This message appears if there is an unprocessed job (jobs standing by for processing) at powering on.

Measure:

Select whether the job is deleted or not by pressing the

key or

key.

The operation goes in time out in about 10 seconds unless the key is pressed, and the device starts with the job save.

5-3

Table 5-1 If a Job has been Left at Powering on

Job status Standing for processing

Display DELETE JOB?

Transaction Job is deleted by designation.

Processing

—

Job is automatically moved to "already processed" job.

Processed

—

Jobs are automatically deleted from the oldest job in order.

W UN - I N I T .

NVRAM

Description:

This message appears if the nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCBASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 board) is not initialized.

Measure:

The display of this warning message remains until the After the

key is pressed.

key was pressed, the NVRAM is initialized automatically and

the display changes to the language setting specifically for the installing operation.

5-4

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.4

Warning

5.4.1

Communication Error

A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the computer and the device. This type of error can be handled by the system administrator of the user. Note:

A communication error appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next operation is performed. Consequently, you may not find the that error occurred. In such a case, retransmit the data to check if the communication error is displayed on the LCD.

(1) Ethernet interface W

I NTERFACE - LN

nnnn nnn: Error code

Table 5-2 Ethernet Warning List Error code

Description

0101

Duplication of XPT port number

0212

Lack of internal memory

Measure Correct machine settings.

If the device is not recovered from this error by turning the power off and on, take the following Host disconnects the communication forcibly while a measures: connection is established Check if the protocol matches the specifications The device failed communication while communication of computer, or Replace the connection cable, or time out data is transferred Check the communication condition from the Communication connection system error online monitor. (Recommended monitor: Sniffer) Communication system internal error

0220 to 022F Protocol data sent from the host is defective 0250 to 025F 0260 to 026F 1000 to 4FFF 5000 to 7FFF

(2) Mail interface W

I NTERFACE - ML

nnnn nnnn: Error code

Table 5-3 Mail Warning List Error code

Description

1100 to 11FF

SMTP server address is not specified.

1200 to 12FF

SMTP server is not found.

1300 to 1AFF

SMPT server ignored protocol, or SMPT server does not respond.

1B00 to 1BFF

SMPT server ignored the terminating processing.

Measure Specify the SMTP server address.

Check the SMPT server for its address setting and the SMPT server host for its status, setting, and connection.

5-5

(3) USB interface

W

I NTERFACE - US

nnnn nnnn: Error code

Table 5-4 USB Warning List Error code

Description

Measure

0300 to 04FF Lack of internal memory 2100 to 24FF 0100 to 01FF 1000 to 1FFF 2000 to 2FFF

5.4.2

If the device is not recovered from this error by turning the power off and on, take the following Protocol data sent from the host is defective measures: The device failed communication while communication Check if the protocol matches the specifications time out data is transferred of computer, or Replace the connection cable, or Communication connection system error Check the communication condition from the online monitor. Communication system internal error

PDL Warning A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the computer and the device. When a PLD error occurs, you can return the LP-1010 to the normal operation from the screen shown below. Note:

The PDL warning appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next operation is performed. Consequently, you may not recognize the that error occurred. It is recommended that the "ERROR MEMO" of "DRAWING PARAM." in the setup menu be turned on, so that the error message is printed on the drawing.

W DATA

nnnn nnnn: Error code

Table 5-5 PDL Warning List (1 / 2)

Error code

Description

0201

W COMMAND ERROR

HP-GL or HP-GL/2 command not supported was received.

0202

W # OF PARAM. ERROR

The number of parameters of HP-GL or HP-GL/2 command is wrong.

0203

5-6

Printed error memo title

W PARAM._RANGE_ERR

Measure

Correct erroneous part at the The plotting instruction that exceeds computer side. the range supported by HP-GL or HPGL/2 command, or the plotting instruction that uses illegal characters was received.

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

Table 5-5 PDL Warning List (2 / 2)

Error code

Printed error memo title

0205

W UNDEFINED COMMAND

Character set instruction of HP-GL or Correct erroneous part at the HP-GL/2 command not supported computer side. was received.

0207

W POLYGON_BFFR_ERR

Correct erroneous part at the Polygon buffer overflow error computer side. (Polygon buffer occurred. upper limit: 106600 points)

0208

—(No error memo)

Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective plotting data exists in HP- effective plotting data is GL command. transferred.

0209

W CHAR._OVERFLOW

There is no empty area in memory for Correct so as to reduce the user registered characters of HP-GL number of registrations or data by (DL/UC command). one character.

0300

W PATTERN OVERFLOW

There are too many pattern Reduce the pattern registrations in registrations in one drawing and the one drawing. pattern memory overflows.

0301

W HATCH OVERFLOW

There are too many hatch Reduce the hatch registrations in registrations in one drawing and the one drawing. pattern memory overflows.

0303

W CHAR._OVERFLOW

Correct so as to reduce the There is no empty area in memory for number of registrations or data by user registered characters of HP-GL. one character.

0305

W SPOOL OVERFLOW

The spool memory overflows.

Install optional HDD, or specify the CENTERING = OFF if the device is used with the CENTERING = ON.

0306

W POLYGON OVERFLOW

Correct erroneous part at the Polygon buffer overflow error computer side. (Polygon buffer occurred. upper limit: 106600 points)

0307 to W PDL ERR 307 to 0313 W PDL ERR 313

Description

Program warning

Measure

If the error is reproducible and the print result is poor, the software must be upgraded to the latest version.

0314

W DATA IGNORED

Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective effective plotting data. plotting data is transferred.

0400

W RASTER_DECODE_ERR

Check the computer side if the The format of the compressed raster format of the compressed raster data is erroneous. data is correct.

0401

W RASTER_FORMAT_ERR

T h e r e i s n o r a s t e r d a t a o f t h e s i z e Check the computer side if data is specified by the data. correct.

0500 to —(No error memo) 0505

Program warning

If the error is reproducible and the print result is poor, the software must be upgraded to the latest version.

0600

W FORMATERROR

TIFF data is erroneous. Or, the device failed plotting due to an omission of essential tag.

0601

W # OF PARAM. ERROR

Correct erroneous part at the The number of parameters of TIFF computer side. data tag is wrong.

0602

W PARAM._RANGE_ERR

The parameter value of TIFF data tag exceeds the supported range.

0603

—(No error memo)

Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective effective plotting data in TIFF data. plotting data is transferred.

0700

—(No error memo)

The device failed plotting due to an Correct erroneous part at the omission of essential record in the computer side. CALS format.

5-7

5.4.3

Engine Warning This error occurs when image data is transferred from the controller to the engine. When this error occurs, the image data has not been transferred to the engine correctly and, therefore, the faulty data may be printed on the paper. Return the device to the normal operation from the following job. W E56E - nnnn nnnn: Error code Table 5-6 Engine Control Warning List

Error code

Description

Measure

9001 to 900F

Hardware chip error (plotter transfer error of gate array)

9011 to 901F

Hardware chip error (scanner transfer error of gate array)

9021 to 90FF

Hardware chip error (gate array operation failure)

5.4.4

Reprint the faulty data. If the error is not removed, replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the RIP board or DRAM.

Main Warning

W

F0 6D - n nnn nnnn: Error code Table 5-7 List of Main Warnings

Error code

0801

0838

5-8

Description

Measure

Spool file error

This error often results from abnormal power-off. If the error does not recur as power is turned on again, there is no problem. If the error still recurred as power is turned on again, confirm with the user in what situation did the error happened. Then replace the relevant parts or upgrade F/W to the latest version. Target part is RIP board (or, DRAM or HDD).

Judgment of PDL is not available from the data

If the error occurs on a specific set of data, a problem on the data should be suspected. If the error occurred on a set of data with which there has been no trouble so far in its output, confirm with the user in what situation the error resulted. Then replace the relevant parts or upgrade F/W to the latest version. Target part is RIP board (or, DRAM or HDD).

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.5

Service Call Error

Service call errors are handled by our Service Center. Hint:

5.5.1

When a service call error occurs, you should request the user to turn off the device once and turn it on again to check whether the error is reproduced. Restarting the machine may reset the error.

Engine Error This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty. E E NG I N E n n n n P OW E R O F F / O N

5.5.2

Description:

nnnn: Error code This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.

Measure:

To correct error, see Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting (Engine Error)."

System Error This error message may appear if an unrecoverable and exceptional system error occurs in the controller of the device. E FFFF - FFFF P OW E R O F F / O N

5.5.3

Description:

An unexpected hardware or program error occurs.

Measure:

Hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Check the hardware for connection. Replace a part. In case of replacement, change the hard disk drive, DRAM, or MRC2 board.

Controller Error This error message may appear if an unrecoverable fatal error occurs in the module provided on the controller of the device.

(1) Error in PDL module E F064 - nnnn P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code Table 5-8 PDL Module Error List Error code

Description

0380 to 039F Program error 0A80 to 0A90

Measure If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the MRC2 board or DRAM.

5-9

(2) Error in Engine Control module

E E56E - nnnn P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code Table 5-9 Engine Control Module Error List Error code

Description

Measure

0111 to 01FF

Program error (task boot error)

0201 to 02FF

0501 - 05FF

Program error (task-to-task communication error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the Program error situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version Hardware chip error (gate array error) accordingly. In case of replacement, change the Engine communication error MRC2 board or DRAM.

0601 - 06FF

Scanner communication error

1000 to 1FFF 0301 to 03FF

0401 to 04FF

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the hard disk drive or optional board (or MRC2 board or DRAM).

Hard disk error

(3) Error in Operation module

E EF70 - nnnn P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code Table 5-10 Operation Module Error List Error code

Description

Measure

0101

Program error (task boot synchronize error)

1000 to 1FFF

Program error

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the MRC2 board or DRAM.

(4) Error in Main module

E F06D - nnn n P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code

5-10

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

Table 5-11 Main Module Error List Error code 0101 0111 to 01FF 0201 to 02FF 1000 to 1FFF

0301 to 03FF

0401 to 04FF

2000 to 2FFF

Description

Measure

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and Program error (task boot synchronize error) turning it on again, hear from the user about the Program error (task boot error) situation when the error occurred, and replace a Program error (task-to-task communication error) part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the Program error MRC2 board or DRAM.

NVRAM error

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the MRC2 board or DRAM.

Hard disk / RAM disk error

- If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. - Alternatively, check the power supply and data cable that are connected to the hard disk drive. If wrong connection is found, correct it. - Check the power supply and data cable, which are connected to the hard disk drive, for damage. If either or both parts are damaged, replace it/them. - In case of replacement, the hard disk drive, optional board, change DRAM or MRC2 board.

Hardware configuration error

This error is attributable to incorrectly configured hardware: for example, the standard panel is not installed. Therefore, check the configuration and, if troubles are found, replace a component or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the panel, NVRAM, or MRC2 board.

(5) Error in Setup module E F375 - nnnn P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code Table 5-12 Setup Error List Error code

Description

0101

Program error (task boot synchronize error)

1000 to 1FFF

Program error

0301 to 03FF

0401 to 04FF

Measure If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the MRC2 board or DRAM.

NVRAM error

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the MRC2 board or DRAM.

Setup control file error

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the MRC2 board or DRAM.

5-11

(6) Error in panel control module

E F06E - nnnn P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code Table 5-13 Panel Control Module Error List Error code

Description

Measure

0201

Program error (initial task interface error)

1000 to 1FFF

Program error

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. In case of replacement, change the hard disk drive or optional board (or MRC2 board or DRAM).

(7) Error in spool module E F375 - nnnn P OW E R O F F / O N nnnn: Error code Table 5-14 Spool Module Error List Error code

Description

Storage access error

1001

5-12

* Logic failure of firmware. * Disconnect of hard disk drive. * Faulty of hard disk drive. * Faulty of DRAM.

Measure - If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. - Alternatively, check the power supply and data cable that are connected to the hard disk drive. If wrong connection is found, correct it. - Check the power supply and data cable, which are connected to the hard disk drive, for damage. If either or both parts are damaged, replace it/them. - In case of replacement, the hard disk drive, change DRAM or MRC2 board.

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.6

Error Log

Each time an error or warning occurs in the device, it is displayed on the LCD and also the error log information is saved in the internal memory. The error log information saved in the internal memory includes additionally the time when an error occurred, and therefore you can confirm the error log using the "ERROR PRINT" of the function menu. (This information is saved even after the power was turned off.)

5.6.1

Classification of Error/Warning The type of error/warning is classified as follows: 1 Classification: E (Service Call) 2 Classification: O (Operator Call) 3 Classification: W (Warning)

5.6.2

An unrecoverable error that needs service person's measures. An error that the operator can take measures. A warning, such as expiration of service life of consumables and data error occurred.

Format of Message Each error/warning message to be logged if an error or warning occurs identifies one character (+ space) at the top the of message as the error/warning identifier. The log message is composed of alphanumerics and thus it does not necessarily match the message displayed on the LCD. The error/warning message registered as log information is prepared in the format mentioned below.

5.6.3

Log Registration Format An error or warning displayed on the LCD is registered as log information in the following format. Case 1 Case 2 Case 3

"yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a bbbb-cccc" "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss cccc" "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss"

yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a bbbbcccc ssssssss

year/month/day hour:minute:second Error/warning identifier (common to LCD display) Error classification (hexadecimal notation) Error code (hexadecimal notation may be omitted) Optional alphanumeric message (may be omitted)

*Log example "2004/05/24 12:31:55 E ENGINE 2030"

Error number:2030=Power supply failure 5-13

5.6.4

Error Log Print Item Table 5-15 Error Log Print Item

Header information

Print item

Log media

Type of log media (log storage position) HDD : Hard disk drive FLASH : Flash memory

Max log number

Number of registrable logs HDD : 8191 FLASH :1023

Log size

Log size per information: 16 bytes

Log set count

Number of registered logs

Error information

Print item

Log

Storage position (1 to 8191)

Date

Error generation date (D/M/Y)

Time

Error generation time

Information

Error message: E sssssss W sssssss O sssssss

5.6.5

E: Fatal error (service call error) W: Warning error O: Operator intervention error

Type of Error Log The errors are classified as follows. The following log examples show the information saved in the log file.

(1) Service Call Error (Classification: E) Description:

An unrecoverable error that needs service person's measures.

Cause:

Hardware or firmware is faulty.

Measure:

If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, replace the hardware or firmware.

*Log example of hard disc error "E E56E-0401"

(2) Operator Call (Classification: O) Description:

An error that the operator can take measures.

Cause:

No paper, no toner or paper jams, which needs operator's help.

Measure:

Remove the cause to restore the device to its normal state.

*Log example of door open "O DOOR2 open"

5-14

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

(3) Warning (Classification: W) Description:

A warning state such as expiration of service life of consumables and data error occurred.

Cause:

A consumable approaches its life, or any failure in the environment, settings, or data occurred.

Measure:

Take appropriate measures to remove the cause. (Service person may partially participate in the measure process.)

*Log example of comand warning "W DATA 0201"

5-15

5.7

Error Log Classification List

Table 5-16 Error Log Classification List Message

5-16

Classification

Description

Measure

E xxxxxxxx (Error)

Service call error

An unrecoverable error needs If the device is not recovered from service person's measures. this error after turning the power off and on, hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred, and upgrade the firmware to the latest version or replace a relevant part accordingly.

O xxxxxxxx (Operator Call)

Operator call

An error that the operator can T a k e m e a s u r e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e take measures. guidance message displayed on the Remove the cause to restore LCD. the device to its normal state.

W xxxxxxxx (Warning)

Warning

A consumable approaches its Remove the cause of failure. life, or faulty in the (The service person may partially environment, settings, or data participate in the measure process.) was detected.

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.8

Job Log

When the device executes a job (i.e. print), a job log is saved in the internal memory. Various types of information, including execution time, are registered in this job log. You can review the job log history from "PRINT JOB LOG" of the function menu. (The job log information is saved even after the power was turned off.) Total count and distance, both of which are updated whenever a new job is executed, are registered in this job log as well. 5.8.1

Job Log Print Item Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item (1 / 2)

Header information

Print item

Log media

Type of log media (log storage position) HDD : Hard disk drive FLASH : Flash memory

Max log number

Number of registrable logs HDD : 65535 FLASH : 1023

Log size

Log size per information: 128 bytes

Log set count

Number of registered logs

Job information

Print item Log file storage position (1 to 65535) (4 digits)

Log Shows the job history number assigned to the job in execution order. Job number (1 to 999) (3 digits) Job When the system recognizes the generation of job, the job number is assigned to the job. Req

Job generation (spool) number (1 to 999) (3 digits) Processing PDL (5 characters)

PDL

Port

A processing PDL is prepared for every data format HPGL/TIFF/CALS/COPY/SCAN Protocol / port number (4 characters) Fxx (FTP), Lxx (LPR), Xxx (XPT), PARA, USB? xx: Port number (1 to 10) IP address (10 characters)

IP-address When the protocol is USB and parallel jobs are executed, the IP address is not defined. File name (12 characters) File Displays the file name that the host reported as printer job. User name (12 characters) User Displays the user name that the host reported as printer job. Receive data size (5 characters) Input Size

This information shows the received data size (amount). Byte, kilobyte, and megabyte are used as unit.

5-17

Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item (2 / 2) Job information

Print item Number of print job (3 characters)

Output Page

This information shows the number of sheets printed in one job, regardless of drawing size. Number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper (3 characters)

Output Acc

This information shows the number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper based on the value indicated by Output Page. (A3/A4 = 1, A2 = 2, A1 = 3, A0 = 5) Receive date

Date

This information shows the date in the format of xx (month) and xx (day). Only figures are displayed. Job start time (receive start time)

Job Start

This information shows the job execution start time in the format of xx (hour) xx (minute) xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.) In case of reprint or additional print, the start time of the new job is displayed here. Job end time

Job End

This information shows the print end time in the format of xx (hour) xx (minute) xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.) Total counter (number of sheets converted into A4/A3 paper) (unit: 10 sheets)

Counter Acc*10

This counter shows the total number of printed sheets that will be updated whenever a new job is executed. "1234" means 12340 sheets. Total distance (unit: 10 m)

Counter Run*10

This counter shows the total print distance that will be updated whenever a new job is executed. "1234" means 12340 meters. Job execution result (status)

Result

5-18

This information shows the execution result of a job. Only after the job is normally ended, the number in Counter Acc*10 is updated. When a recovery process is executed, NORMAL is displayed as status and the counter is ready. NORMAL : Normally terminated. DELETE : Data is discarded. CANCEL : Print (job) is canceled. ERxxxx : Error end. (xxxx: Error log storage position) EXTRA : Additional print AGAIN : Reprint

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.9

Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)

After the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced, the following operations are needed. Be sure to transfer the EEPROM from the old board to the new board. (except where the EEPROM is faulty). Procedures: 1 Enter the serial number of the device. Access "DEVICE SERIAL NO." of the "SYSTEM" menu and enter the serial number of the device. Also, perform the operation for the serial number unset. (See "5.10 Serial Number Unset".) 2 Perform the install operations and set of IP address. (Refer to the user's guide.) 3 Reset the each setting value on the other PCB - ASSY - MRC2.

Note:

EEPROM contains important information such as counter. Pay close attention not to break its legs or mount the element upside down during removal and installation.

5-19

5.10

Serial Number Unset

After powering on, the device self-tests the area in which its serial number has been saved (flash memory). If it is proved that the area is damaged or is not initialized, the following message appears on the LCD. The message appears when the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced with an uninitialized board. When this message appears, you must enter the maintenance person mode and enter the serial number. E

SET

Measure:

THE

S /N

Enter the device serial number using the following procedures. E

SET

THE

S / N

1 Press the keys in the following order.

P A S S WO R D I N P U T MO D E

2 Press the keys in the following order. I NPUT LEVEL

SER I A L * 00000

3 Enter the serial number of the device. 4 Press the

5-20

key.

OK 003

N UMB E R

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

Chapter 6

Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

This chapter describes the troubleshooting if a failure occurs in the engine. If a message as shown below is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, take a corrective measure following an error code "nnnn" of the error message. For other troubles, take a corrective measure according to the symptom. E ENG I NE nnnn P OW E R OF F / ON Error code

6.1

How to Read This Manual

6.1.1

Overview of Engine Troubleshooting When troubleshooting the engine, first perform the level-1 troubleshooting to classify the trouble. Then, advance the troubleshooting by performing the level-2 troubleshooting. When you try to find a cause of the trouble through the troubleshooting or on the check-chart, read the procedure carefully to avoid a failure. Also, if multiple causes are supposed, it is difficult to find all causes at a time, and therefore you may have to perform the troubleshooting of the same title again. In such a case, even for the same troubleshooting, ongoing judgment may change, thus requiring extreme care.

Level-1 troubleshooting The level-1 troubleshooting is the first step of troubleshooting. The level-1 troubleshooting clarifies whether an error code or other trouble symptom is present or not to provide a hint for proceeding to the level-2 troubleshooting. Level-2 troubleshooting The level-2 troubleshooting provides the classified troubleshooting procedures according to the error code, paper jam, and other various symptoms. As a trouble diagnostic method, a cause of the trouble can be found in a short time by performing the procedure given by the troubleshooting or on the check-chart. 6-1

Error code :

If an error code indicating an engine trouble is displayed on the LCD, refer to the error description, resetting method, and corresponding troubleshooting item from the error code list to perform the troubleshooting.

Paper jam :

If a paper jam occurs frequently, refer to the description of the paper jam code list to perform the paper jam troubleshooting.

Other symptoms :

If an error code is not displayed or any trouble other than paper jam occurs, judge an engine block concerned from the symptom to perform the troubleshooting.

Maintenance diagnostic mode This device provides various self-diagnostic functions to check or test the condition of each part of the engine. These self-diagnostic functions are executed during the level-2 troubleshooting in the engine maintenance mode. For each function and its operating procedure in the engine maintenance mode, see Section 2.

6.1.2

Terminology The terms listed below are frequently used in the engine troubleshooting. Before performing the trouble analysis, understand the meaning of these terms.

Common terms

6-2

Error code :

"nnnn" of an error message "E ENGINE nnnn" displayed on the LCD of the control panel if the engine finds a trouble is called the error code.

Visual check :

Check visually the operation of parts such as a relay and mechanical linkage to find any faulty.

Enter maintenance

Enter the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.1.1). Then,

code 03:

select the maintenance code and press the

Turn on power :

Turn on the Power switch.

Turn off power :

Turn off the Power switch.

Check for a short :

Turn off the Power switch. Measure resistance between pin and frame in the ohm range of the tester.

key.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

Select a subcode :

Enter the engine maintenance mode following the procedure given in "2.1.1 How to Enter the Engine Maintenance Mode," and select the maintenance code . Then, select a subcode "nn" and press the

key.

"On" display ("Off" display) : This means that the maintenance code is activated and a subcode is selected, and then the signal level inputted to the LCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) is displayed on the LCD. "On" or "Off" is displayed. Exit from trouble analysis procedure Mechanical trouble :

This term is used when you shift to mechanical adjustment or part replacement. Read all items (main causes are described) for comparison with a symptom appearing in the machine to find a cause of the trouble.

Replace one after another : If a trouble is no longer analyzed, this device uses a method in which a part is replaced one after another. The parts to be replaced are listed in the order having high replacement frequency and high probability of trouble.

6-3

6.2

Leve-1 Troubleshooting

The level-1 troubleshooting sorts the troubles. If "E ENGINE nnnn" is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, perform the troubleshooting following this unrecoverable error code (see Section 6.3.1). If a paper jam occurs frequently, enter the engine maintenance mode to check the paper jam situations and perform the troubleshooting (see Section 6.3.2). For other cases, make judgment from the symptom and perform the troubleshooting (see Section 6.3.3). 6.2.1

Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description Table 6-1 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (1 / 2)

Unrecoverable error codes 2020 2021, 2022 2023 2024, 202A

6-4

Description BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble PM01 (process motor) trouble GM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble

2026, 202B

TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble

2027, 202C

FM01 (paper feed pulse motor 1) trouble

2028, 202D

FM02 (paper feed pulse motor 2) trouble

2029, 202E

FM03 (paper feed pulse motor 3) trouble

2030

Power supply failure (50 Hz/60 Hz evaluation value is faulty)

2032

High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)

2033

Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power is turned off)

2035

LED head correction data transfer error (time out)

2036

LED head correction data transfer error (header error)

2037

LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)

2081

TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature

2082

TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)

2083

TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp

2084

After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH01 did not reach specified temp within specified time

2085

TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted) or extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)

2086

TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp

2087

TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)

2088

TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp

2089

After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH04 did not reach specified temp within specified time

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

Table 6-1 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (2 / 2) Unrecoverable error codes 20C1 to 20C3

Description NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)

20C4

NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)

20C5

NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)

20C6

NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)

20C8

NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)

20C9

NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)

20CA

NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)

20D1 to 20D8

NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)

20E0

WDT (watchdog timer) overflow

2D01

NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned

2D02

Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned

2D03

When receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times

2D04

Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned

2F7C

After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7D

After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written in the flash memory (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7E

After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten in the flash memory does not match (F/W cannot be restored)

2F7F

After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten in the flash memory does not match the contents of SRAM (F/W cannot be restored)

6-5

6.2.2

Paper Jam Error Codes and Description Table 6-2 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes

Paper jam error codes 3330

Paper is located at PS30 (under cutter) position

3331

Paper is located at PS31 (under cutter) position

3332

Paper is located at PS32 (under cutter) position

3400

Paper is located at PS04 (under cutter) position

3401, 3402

Arrival of paper top edge at PS04 is too early

3403, 3404

Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04

3491, 3492

When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too early

3493, 3494

When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04 though preset paper pass time passed

3500

Paper is located at PS04 (register) position

3501, 3502

Arrival of paper top edge at PS05 is too early

3503, 3504

Paper top edge does not arrive at PS05

3591, 3592

Paper trail edge leaves PS05 too early

3593, 3594

Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 though preset paper pass time passed

3600

Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position

3601, 3602

Arrival of paper top edge at PS06 is too early

3603, 3604

Paper top edge does not arrive at PS06

3691, 3692

Paper trail edge leaves PS06 too early

3693, 3694

Paper trail edge does not leave PS06 though preset paper pass time passed

3700 3701, 3702

Paper is located at PS07 (fuser) position Arrival of paper top edge at PS07 is too early

3703, 3704

Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04

3791, 3792

Paper trail edge leaves PS07 too early

3793, 3794

Paper trail edge does not leave PS07 though preset paper pass time passed

3042 to 3047

6-6

Description

Trouble when cutter blade moves

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

6.3

Leve-2 Troubleshooting

6.3.1

"Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting

(1) "2020" troubleshooting This trouble occurs if the BM01 motor does not rotate. Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (09) that corresponds to the displayed error code to turn on the motor. Is the motor rotating? Y N Is +24VDC present between CN7-1 and CN7-5 of PCB-ASSY-MEC? Y N ◆ Check CBL07 for a disconnection or short. ◆ Check low voltage power unit. ◆ Check if the load on mechanical system is large. ◆ Check CBL03B and CBL032 for a short. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(2) "2021" / "2022" / "2024" / "202A" troubleshooting These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies. First, check if the interlock switches (INT1 and INT3) are normal. Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (07 to 08) that corresponds to the displayed error code to turn on the motor. Is the motor rotating? Y N Is +24VDC present between CN7-1 and CN7-5 of PCB-ASSY-MEC? Y N ◆ Check CBL07 for a disconnection or short. ◆ Check low voltage power unit. ◆ Check if the load on mechanical system is large. ◆ HM trouble Check CBL05A and CBL051 for a short. ◆ GM trouble Check CBL05A, CBL51 and CBL052 for a short. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

6-7

(3) "2023" troubleshooting These troubles occur if the PM01 motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies. First, check if the interlock switches (INT1 and INT3) are normal. Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (06) that corresponds to the displayed error code to turn on the motor. Is the motor rotating? Y N Is +24VDC present between CN7-1 and CN7-5 of PCB-ASSY-MEC? Y N ◆ Check CBL07 for a disconnection or short. ◆ Check low voltage power unit. ◆ Check if the load on mechanical system is large. ◆ Check CBL06A and CBL061 for a short or open circuit. If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). Mechanical system check ◆ Check the clutch for operation. ◆ Check the gear for damage or galling. If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

6-8

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(4) "2026" / "202B" / "2027" / "202C" "2028" / "202D" / "2029" / "202E" troubleshooting These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies. First, check if the interlock switches (INT1 and INT3) are normal. Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (10 to13) that corresponds to the displayed error code to turn on the motor. Is the motor rotating? Y N Is +24VDC present between CN21-1 and CN21-2 of PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver bord)? Y N ◆ Check CBL07 and CBL 071 for a disconnection or short. ◆ Check low voltage power unit. Are other motors rotating? Y N ◆ Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). ◆ Check if the load on mechanical system is large. ◆ Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit. - TM trouble Check CBL22 for a short or open circuit. - FM01 trouble Check CBL23 and CBLR231 for a short or open circuit. - FM02 trouble Check CBL24 and CBLR241 for a short or open circuit. - FM03 trouble Check CBL25 and CBLR251 for a short or open circuit. Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) Mechanical system check ◆ Check the clutch for operation. ◆ Check the gear for damage or galling.

6-9

(5) "2030" troubleshooting Input of frequency counter pulses from the power supply is faulty. ◆ Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit. If not so, replace the low voltage power unit or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(6) "2032" troubleshooting Either of CH1 to CH4 of high voltage outputs is shorted. Turn on the CH1 to CH4 one by one to check if the discharge sound is heard or the monitor output of high voltage power is stable so as to identify which channel is shorted. For a monitoring method of high voltage power unit, see 9.1. Enter the maintenance code 09 in the engine maintenance mode. Select a subcode that corresponds to each process. CH1 failure (subcode 01) ◆ Check the process cartridge (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or slack. Check the grid for dirtiness or slack.) ◆ Check the CBL-HV1 for a short. If so, replace respective parts. CH2 failure (subcode 02) ◆ Check the developer (Check the developer bias contact for a touch.) ◆ Check the CBL-HV22, CBL-HV2, CBL-HV21 for a short. If so, replace respective parts. CH3 failure (subcode 03) ◆ Check the transfer unit (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.) ◆ Check the CBL-HV3 for a short. If so, replace respective parts. CH4 failure (subcode 04) ◆ Check the separator (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.) ◆ Check the CBL-HV4 for a short. If so, replace respective parts. If all channels are faulty Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.

6-10

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(7) "2033" troubleshooting The running distance data may not be saved in the NVRAM on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) when the plotter was turned off in the previous job. Possible causes of this error will be low voltage power unit, faulty PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board), or faulty CBL09. Turn off the plotter once, and after several seconds, turn it on again. Does 2033 error occur? Y N Check if the running distance is correct, and if OK, the plotter is normal. NG, go to the next step. Referring to Appendix A.2.1 (4), check the LED indication on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) when the power is turned off. Are LED 4 to 8 on PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) turned on? Y N Replace lower voltage power unit. ◆ Check the CBL09 for a short or open circuit. ◆ Check the 5 V of PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(8) "2035" / "2036" / "2037" troubleshooting These troubles will occur when the "config" (writing of correction data) for the LED head was not executed normally. Is +5VDC present between CN4 (CN5)-1 and CN4 (CN5)-4 of LED head? Y N ◆ Check the CBL13 and CBL121 for a disconnection or short. ◆ Check the low voltage power supply. If not so, replace the LED head. ◆ Check the CBL08 If not so, replace the LED head or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

6-11

(9) "2081" troubleshooting ◆ Check the TH01 (fuser control thermistor) for a mounting state (such as disconnected connector, remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01). ◆ Check the TH01 contact surface with the heat roller for dirtiness. Clean as necessary. ◆ Check the TH01 for an open circuit. If so, replace the TH01. ◆ Check the CBL45 and CBL04B for a short. ◆ Check the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is less than 1k . ◆ Check the CBL04B and CBL045 for a short. If so, replace respective parts. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(10) "2082" / "2087" troubleshooting ◆ Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is less than 1k . ◆ Check the CBL04B and CBL045 for a short. If so, replace respective parts. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(11) "2083" / "2088" troubleshooting Check respective fans for operation one by one. Check the BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation. Does each fan operate normally? Y N Replace faulty fan. Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short. ◆ Check the TH01 and TH04. If so, replace TH01 or TH04. ◆ Check the CBL04B and CBL045. ◆ Check the ozone filter for clogging. If clogged, replace the ozone filter. Note:

6-12

Check that the halogen lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a several second interval.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(12) "2084" / "2089" troubleshooting Check if the halogen lamp (fuser lamp) turns on.

WARNING -

Before checking the halogen lamp on/off operation, make sure that fuser unit temperature has dropped sufficiently. Note:

After the halogen lamp was checked for its lighting, immediately turn off the halogen lamp (turn off the power switch or open the cover).

Does the halogen lamp turn on? Y N Check the THM (thermal fuse) for continuity. Is the fuse continuous? Y N Replace the Thermal Fuse Assy. *After the fuse was replaced, execute again "2084" troubleshooting. ◆ Check the FL01 and FL02 (lamp) for continuity. Is the lamp continuous? Y

N Replace the halogen lamp which is not continuous.

◆ Check the CBL17, CBL171 and CBL- HTR for an open circuit. ◆ Check the CBL09 for a short or open circuit. If the trouble is not removed, replace the low voltage current or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). ◆ Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) and the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a mounting state (such as disconnected connector, remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01, TH02, or TH04). ◆ Check the contact surface of TH01, TH02, and TH04 with the heat roller for dirtiness. Clean as necessary. ◆ Check the TH01, TH02 and TH04 for a short or open circuit. If so, replace TH01, TH02 and TH04. ◆ Check the CBL04B and CBL045. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

6-13

(13) "2085" troubleshooting ◆ Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is less than 1kΩ. If so, replace the LED head. ◆ Check the CBL05B and CBL053 for a short. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(14) "2086" troubleshooting Check respective fans for operation one by one. Check the BL01 (suction fan) BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation. Does each fan operate normally? Y N Replace faulty fan. Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short. ◆ Check the TH03. If so, replace the LED head. ◆ Check the CBL05B and CBL053. ◆ Check the ozone filter for clogging. If clogged, replace the ozone filter.

(15) "20C1 to 20CA" / "20D1 to 20D8" / "20E0" troubleshooting Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(16) "2D01 to 2D04" troubleshooting ◆ Check the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (controller board). ◆ Check the CBL02 for a short or open circuit. If so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (engine control board).

(17) "2F7C to 2F7F" troubleshooting Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

6-14

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

6.3.2

"Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting

(1) Power ON jam checkout procedure This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble for which a paper jam error message is displayed on the LCD before printing. Note:

When two or more doors are displayed on the LCD, check the sensors that correspond to all doors.

Example: If the specified door is one OP E N DOOR X R EMO V E P A P E R

If the specified doors are two or more O P E N DOOR X , X R E MO V E P A P E R

1 Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode, and check corresponding sensors listed below from respective subcodes for each target door involved in paper jam.

Paper jam target door

"Door 1" or "Door 2" or "Door 3"

"Door 4" or "Door 5"

Maintenance code

Sensor

Items to be checked

PS30 (A0 paper size sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL28-PS30 short (GND) - CBL28-PS30 loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

PS31 (A1 paper jam4 sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL28-PS31 short (GND) - CBL28-PS31 loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

PS32 (A2 paper size sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL28-PS32 short (GND) - CBL28-PS32 loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

PS04 (paper size sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL28-PS04 short (GND) - CBL28-PS04 loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

PS05 (paper registration sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 short (GND) - CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

PS06 (suction jam sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 short (GND) - CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

PS07 (fuser jam sensor)

- Light enters the sensor. - CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) short (GND) - CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) loose connector or disconnection (open) - Sensor failure

"Door 6"

6-15

2 Replace the sensor, and when the sensor is kept on even if each sensor code is entered, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board). The sensor itself goes low when the light is intercepted.

(2) "Frequent paper jam" troubleshooting This troubleshooting is used to guide which paper jam troubleshooting is to be executed according to the paper jam situations. Note:

Turn off the power switch and check that no paper remains in the machine.

Turn on the power switch. Is the paper jam door displayed on LCD? Y N Perform the "frequent paper jam" troubleshooting. Enter the maintenance code 05 in the engine maintenance mode. Check the last ten jam codes displayed on the LCD. At this time, perform the troubleshooting one by one, starting from the code that occurred most frequently. ◆ Jam code "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3403" / "3404" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3491" / "3492" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3493" / "3494" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3501" / "3502" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3503" / "3504" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3591" / "3592" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3593" / "3594" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3601" / "3602" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3603" / "3604" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3691" / "3692" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3693" / "3694" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3701" / "3702" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3703" / "3704" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3791" / "3792" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3793" / "3794" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "37A1" / "37A2" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3801" / "3802" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3803" / "3804" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3891" / "3892" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3893" / "3894" troubleshooting ◆ Jam code "3805" / "3806" troubleshooting Perform the "Power ON jam checkout procedure."

6-16

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" / troubleshooting ◆ Check if paper chips or foreign materials remain in the cutter unit. ◆ Check if wrong type of paper is used. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 17 or 18 to sense RE01 or RE02 (cutter left or right home position switch). Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL27 and CBL62 for a short or open circuit. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board), next, replace the cutter unit (RE01, RE02 faulty) in the following order. ◆ Check the cutter blade stop position relative to the RE01 and RE02. If the position is inadequate, replace the cutter unit. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

(4) Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early after start. ◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting. ◆ Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials. ◆ Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Is PS04 mounted correctly? (PS04 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4). ◆ Check the paper path up to the PS04.

6-17

(5) Jam code "3403" / "3404" troubleshooting Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too lately after start. ◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remains in the PS04. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 04 to sense PS04 (paper jam sensor 4). Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL28 for a short or open circuit. ◆ Check the PS04 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If not so, replace the PS04. Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors). Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?) Y N Execute "2021" troubleshooting fi see Section 6.3.1 (2) ◆ Check the paper path up to the PS04. ◆ Check the pinch roller for pressure.

(6) Jam code "3491" / "3492" troubleshooting At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early. ◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Is PS04 mounted correctly? (PS04 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS04. Check the paper path from PS04 up to PS05 (paper registration sensor).

6-18

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(7) Jam code "3493" / "3494" troubleshooting At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too slow. ◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting. ◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS04. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 04 to sense PS04 (paper jam sensor 4). Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL28 for short. ◆ Check the PS04 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If so, replace the PS04. Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors). Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?) Y N Execute “2021” troubleshooting ⇒ see Section 6.3.1 (2) ◆ Check the paper path up to the PS04.

(8) Jam code "3501" / "3502" troubleshooting The top edge of paper reached to the PS05 (registration sensor) too early. ◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting. ◆ Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. ◆ Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials. Is PS05 mounted correctly? (PS05 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS05. ◆ Check the paper path up to the PS05.

6-19

(9) Jam code "3503" / "3504" troubleshooting The top edge of paper reached the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow. ◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 05 to sense PS05 Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL04,CBL041 and CBL044 for a short. ◆ Check the PS05 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS05. ◆ Check the paper path up to the PS04 from PS05. ◆ When the jammed paper remains in the cutter, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. ◆ Check the pinch roller for pressure.

(10) Jam code "3591" / "3592" troubleshooting The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too early. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. ◆ Check the registration roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials. Is PS05 mounted correctly? (PS05 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS05. ◆ Check the paper path up to the PS05. ◆ Check the pinch roller for pressure. Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?) Y N ◆ Check the paper feed for load. ◆ Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).

6-20

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(11) Jam code "3953" / "3954" troubleshooting The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow. ◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS05. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 05, Check the PS05. Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL04A, CBL041 and CBL044 for a short. ◆ Check the PS05 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS05. ◆ Check the operation for CL04 (clutch (registration)) ◆ Check the paper pass for over PS05. ◆ Check the pinch roller for pressure. ◆ Check the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) → Motor FG signal does not come → Paper cut length becomes long.

(12) Jam code "3601" / "3602" troubleshooting The paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS06. ◆ Check the CL04 (registration clutch) for operation and for ON/OFF synchronization with the registration roller. If so, check the LC04 for a mounting clearance.

6-21

(13) Jam code "3603" / "3604" troubleshooting The top edge of paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow. ◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 06, sense to PS06. Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL04A, CBL041 and CBL043 for a short. ◆ Check the PS06 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If so, persists, replace the PS06. A mechanical trouble has occurred. Check the paper path. ◆ Check the paper for running condition and shape of leading edge. ◆ Check the belts for elongation. ◆ Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding. ◆ Check if the paper floats up by getting stuck to the separating finger (OPC). ◆ Check if the paper is separated from the drum correctly. ◆ Check the BL01 for operation. ◆ Check the ozone filter (for lifetime). (14) Jam code "3691" / "3692" troubleshooting The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS06. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

Check the paper for running condition or for floating up by wrinkle or slack. Check the paper for floating up due to a paper separation failure from the drum. Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding. Check the BL01 for operation. Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).

Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?) Y N

◆ Check the paper feed for load. ◆ Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor). 6-22

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(15) Jam code "3693" / "3694" troubleshooting The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow. ◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS06. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 06, sense to PS06. Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL04A, CBL041 and CBL043 for a short. ◆ Check the PS06 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS06. ◆ Check the paper pass to PS07. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding. Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets). Check the BL01 for operation (A4 size). Check the ozone filter (A4 size). Check the air bleeding (A4 size).

(16) Jam code "3701" / "3702" troubleshooting The bottom paper passed the PS07 (suction jam sensor) too early. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS07. ◆ Check the paper path. ◆ Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light. ◆ Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).

6-23

(17) Jam code "3703" / "3704" troubleshooting The top edge of paper reached the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 07, sense to PS07. Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL04A, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short. ◆ Check the PS07 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS07. A mechanical trouble has occurred. Check the paper path. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding. Check the fuser drive mechanism. Check the paper for deformation by getting stuck to the separation finger (fuser, IN). Check if the paper is separated from the heat roller correctly. Check the BL01 for operation. Check the ozone filter.

(18) Jam code "3791" / "3792" troubleshooting The bottom paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too early. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.) Y N If so, replace the PS07. ◆ Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light. ◆ Check the fuser drive mechanism. ◆ Check the paper path. (Check the paper guide in the vicinity of PS07 for shape, curve, or warp (clearance of path).

6-24

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(19) Jam code "3793" / "3794" troubleshooting The bottom edge of paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow. ◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS07. ◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.). In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion. Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 07, sense to PS07. Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed? Y N ◆ Check the CBL04B, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short. ◆ Check the PS07 for setting failure or faulty lever shape. If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS07. A mechanical trouble has occurred. Check the paper path.

6-25

6.3.3

Troubleshooting by symptom

(1) "Door open check" troubleshooting This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a "Door open check" is displayed on the LCD of the control panel and the print is disabled though the doors and covers are closed. Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 to 4 displayed on the LCD. 1 Troubleshooting of "CLOSE DOOR 5" display

CAUTION -

If INT3 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization that returns the cutter to the home position. To avoid this, never touch the INT3.

Open the cutter door (Door 5). The INT3 (cutter door interlock switch) turns on. Does "CLOSE DOOR 5" display disappear? Y

◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

6-26

N Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 21. Is "On" displayed? Y N ◆ Check the INT 3. ◆ Contacts in signal system of INT3 may be faulty. ◆ CBL03A, CBL031, or CBL14 may be disconnected or connected loosely. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

Check the INT 3 for its mounting state. Check the actuator for a breakage or bending. Check mechanical parts. Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

2 Troubleshooting of "CLOSE DOOR 1" display Note:

Execute the troubleshooting of 4 first.

CAUTION -

If PS21 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization. To avoid this, never touch the PS21.

◆ Check the PS21. ◆ Contacts in signal system of PS21 may be faulty, or PS21 itself may be faulty. ◆ CBL23, CBLR231, or ROLL1CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).

3 Troubleshooting of "CLOSE DOOR 2" display

CAUTION -

If PS22 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization. To avoid this, never touch the PS22.

◆ Check the PS22. ◆ Contacts in signal system of PS22 may be faulty, or PS22 itself may be faulty. ◆ CBL24, CBLR241, or ROLL2CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).

6-27

(2) "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" troubleshooting This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the toner refilling is displayed and the print is disabled though the toner was refilled. Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 and 2 displayed on the LCD.

1 Troubleshooting of "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display Set the toner cartridge and pull the lever to the right. Does "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display on LCD disappear? Y N Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 15. Is the "ON " displayed ? Y N ◆ Check the MS04 (toner door open-close switch). ◆ Contacts of MS04 may be faulty. ◆ Check the CBL05A, CBL051 and CBL052 for a short. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

◆ Check the MS04 for its mounting state. ◆ Check the toner cartridge for deformation or any fault. ◆ Check if the toner cartridge is set correctly. ◆ Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

6-28

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

2 Troubleshooting of "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" display Push the lock of the lever with your finger to unlock, and pull the lever to the right. Check the hopper of developer for toner remaining quantity. Does the toner remain sufficiently (agitator shaft is not visible)? Y N Return the lever to the left.

Refill the toner.

Is "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" displayed again after one minute? Y N Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 25. Is the "ON " displayed ? Y

N ◆ Check the TS01 (toner remaining quantity sensor). ◆ Check the CBL05A, CBL051 and CBL052 for a short. Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard) or developer.

◆ Check the toner cartridge for its expiration date. ◆ Check if the toner was set after adequate agitation. ◆ Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard).

6-29

(3) "Replace waste toner cartridge" troubleshooting This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the waste toner cartridge replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the cartridge was replaced. Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1, 2 displayed on LCD of the control panel. 1 Troubleshooting of "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display Set the waste toner cartridge. Does "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear? Y N Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 16. Is "On" displayed? Y N ◆ Check the MS05 (waste toner cartridge detection switch). ◆ Contact fault of MS05. ◆ Check the CBL03A, CBL031, or MS05 ASSY disconnected . If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

Check the MS05 for its mounting state. Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault. Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly. Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

2 Troubleshooting of "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display Set the new waste toner cartridge. Does "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear? Y N Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 26. Is "On" displayed? Y N ◆ Check the MS05 (waste toner sensor). (Check the TS02 by applying a magnetic screwdriver or steel plate such as a metallic ruler, and full waste toner cartridge to the TS02.) ◆ Check the TS02 and the cartridge for clearance. ◆ Check the CBL03A, CBL031, and CBL035 for a short, loose connection, or disconnection. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

6-30

Check the MS02 for its mounting state. Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault. Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly. Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

(4) "Replace paper" troubleshooting This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the paper replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the paper was replaced. Perform the following troubleshooting according to the display on LCD of the control panel. Troubleshooting of "SET PAPER" display Set the paper roll attached with the paper flange. Does "SET PAPER" display on LCD disappear? Y N Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 08, 09 and 10. Is "On" displayed? Y N ◆ Check the PS11 (Roll 1 sensor) or PS12 (Roll 2 sensor). ◆ Contacts in signal system of PS11 or PS12 may be faulty, or PS itself may be faulty. ◆ Check the CBL23, CBLR231, CBL24, CBLR241, CBL25 and CBLR251 for a short. ◆ Check the PS11 or PS12 for its mounting position. ◆ Check the flange guide for its mounting position. If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

◆ Check the PS11 and PS12 for its mounting state. ◆ Check the flange guide for its mounting position. ◆ Check the paper flange for deformation or any fault. ◆ Check if the paper flange is set correctly. Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board).

6-31

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

Chapter 7

Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

This chapter describes the type of print quality troubles and its corrective measures.

7.1

Print Quality Troubleshooting Method

If a print quality trouble occurs, print an engine test pattern saved in the memory inside the engine to check if there is a failure at the engine side (hereinafter a printing of this engine test pattern is called the engine test print). The print quality troubleshooting method is classified into the following two depending on the contents of failure. -

For the failures in the plotting length accuracy or registration, measure the printed engine test pattern at the position shown in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure" to judge whether the measured value satisfies the reference value.

-

For the failures in the background or print density, check doubtful parts from the symptom to take a corrective measure. See "7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure."

7-1

7.1.1

Type of Engine Test Patterns

To output engine test patterns, enter maintenance code 10 in the engine maintenance mode, select the appropriate subcode, and execute the engine test print. For procedures on how to print test patterns, see Section 2.3.10. Table 7-1 shows the relationship between subcodes and engine test patterns. Table 7-1 Engine Test Pattern List Subcode

Engine test pattern

Evaluation item

01

Pattern 1 Vertical zebra (thick vertical stripes)

- Ghost

02

Pattern 2 Checkerboard

- Print density / base paper soiling

03

Pattern 3

04

Pattern 4 1 by 3 horizontal

05

Pattern 5 2 by 2 horizontal

06

Pattern 6 2 by 14 horizontal

07

Pattern 7 1-dot line, 64-dot square mesh

08

Pattern 8 1-dot mes

09

Pattern 9 2-dot mesh

10

Pattern 10 4-dot mesh

- Reproducibility of thin lines - Measurement and adjustment of print length - Measurement and adjustment of registration - Continuous printing

11

Pattern 11 2 by 2 vertical, 2-dot shift

- Inuniform LED illumination

12

Pattern 12 black / white + Mesh

- Image density / base paper soiling / line width measurement

13

Pattern 13 Mesh + scale

14

Pattern 14 Mesh + slant line,1-dot

15

Pattern 15 Mesh + slant line, 2-dot

16

Pattern 16

17

Pattern 17 Solid black

18

Pattern 18 Solid white

19

Pattern 19 1 by 3 vertica

20

Pattern 20 2 by 2 vertical

Horizontal zebra (thick horizontal stripes)

Mesh + slant line, (1 and 2 dots mixed)

- Ghost - Jitter - Nonuniform LED illumination - Skip/smear - Formation of toner layer on the magnet roller - Resolution - Image uniformity - Adjustment of LED head joint - Adjustment of fixation position

- Cut length accuracy / cut squareness - Plotting length accuracy / plotting squareness - Measurement and adjustment of registration - Skew - Reproducibility of thin lines - Continuous printing - Image uniformity - Adjustment of fixing roller nip pressure - Nonuniform LED illumination

Engine test pattern image outputs are shown on the next page. Note:

Test patterns on the next page are only example showing what patterns will be output. Pattern sizes and intervals are different from those actually output. Test patterns 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 17 are represented in solid black. But, they have different images in actual output. Test patterns 8, 9, and 10 are actually different with respect to line thickness. Test patterns 14, 15, and 16 are actually different with respect to line thickness and pattern combination. Test patterns 18, or solid white pattern, is omitted in this example.

7-2

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Pattern 6 Pattern 7 Pattern 11 Pattern 17

Pattern 8

Pattern 12

Pattern 9 Pattern 10

Pattern 13

Pattern 14 Pattern 15 Pattern 16

7-3

7.2

Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

7.2.1

Plotting Specification and Measuring Method Note:

No. 1

To check registrations (top edge and side), always print the appropriate test patterns. Also, replace the normal paper and the tracing paper and execute the engine test print. Sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.

Item Accuracy of plotting length

Measurement position

Standard

Main scan direction : Measure the horizontal H that is composed of 74 blocks. Sub scan direction : Measure the vertical dimension V that is composed of 104 blocks.

Remarks

- Main scan direction: Engine test pattern 15 802±0.5 % (±4 mm) - Sub scan direction: 1127.1±0.5 % (±5.6 mm)

* Output three sheets in succession and measure the third sheet. * Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and measure the test sheet. * 1 block = 10.837 mm 2

Plotting squareness

Measure the horizontal dimension H composed of 74 - ± 0.2% blocks, vertical dimension B composed of 74 blocks, and diagonal dimension C to calculate the squareness using the following equation.

{ (C -

H2 + B 2 )

/

H2+B2 }

Engine test pattern 15

× 100

* Output three sheets in succession and measure the third sheet. * Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and measure the test pattern. * 1 block = 10.837 mm

2 block

H

2 block

Paper output direction

B

C V

7-4

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

No. 3

Item Top edge registration

Measurement position Access the K'th block counted from the right edge, and measure V that is the vertical dimension of the two frontmost blocks. * Output three sheets in succession and measure the third sheet. * Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and measure the test pattern. * 1 block = 10.837 mm * A1 vertical direction: K = 27 blocks. A2 vertical direction: K = 20 blocks. A3 vertical direction: K = 15 blocks. A4 horizontal direction: K = 15 blocks.

4

Center registration

Access the second block counted from the top edge, and measure H1 that is the horizontal dimension of the two rightmost blocks. * Output three sheets in succession and measure the third sheet. * Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and measure the test pattern. * 1 block = 10.837 mm

5

Skew

Access the L'th block counted from the top edge, and measure H2 that is the horizontal dimension of the two rightmost blocks. Subtract H2 from H1 to get skew. * A0 vertical direction: L = 104 blocks. A1 vertical direction: L = 74 blocks. A2 vertical direction: L = 50 blocks. A3 vertical direction: L = 33 blocks. A4 horizontal direction: L = 22 blocks.

2 block

K H1

Standard

Remarks

- A1 vertical direction: 21.7±3.0 mm - A2 vertical direction: 21.7±3.0 mm - A3 vertical direction: 21.7±3.0 mm - A4 horizontal direction: 21.7±3.0 mm

- Engine test pattern 15

- A1 vertical direction: 21.7±3.0 mm - A2 vertical direction: 21.7±3.0 mm - A3 vertical direction: 21.7±3.0 mm - A4 horizontal direction: 21.7±3.0 mm

- Engine test pattern 15

- A0 vertical direction: ±5.6 mm - A1 vertical direction: ±4 mm - A2 vertical direction: ±2.7 mm - A3 vertical direction: ±1.8 mm - A4 horizontal direction: ±1.2 mm

- Engine test pattern 15

V

Paper output direction

L

H2

7-5

No. 6

Item

Measurement position

Cut length accuracy Measure L, which is the overall length from top to bottom edge, at the rightmost position. * Output three sheets in succession and measure the third sheet. * Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and measure the test pattern.

7

Cut squareness

Measure V1 (right edge) and V2 (left edge) at the second block counted from the top edge. Subtract V2 from V1. * Output three sheets in succession and measure the third sheet. * Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and measure the test pattern. * 1 block = 10.837 mm

Standard

Remarks

- A0 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15 1189±6.0 mm - A1 vertical direction: 841±4.0 mm - A2 vertical direction: 594±3.0 mm - A3 vertical direction: 420±3.0 mm - A4 horizontal direction: 210±3.0 mm - A0 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15 ±3.0/841 mm - A1 vertical direction: ±2.0/594 mm - A2 vertical direction: ±1.4/420 mm - A3 vertical direction: ±1.0/297 mm - A4 horizontal direction: ±1.0/297 mm

V1 V2 Paper output direction

L

7.2.2

Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure The parameters that do not meet the required standards must be corrected referencing to the appropriate procedures specified in Section 9.4 "Correction of Plotting Parameter."

7-6

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

7.3

Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure

Table 7-2 lists the image quality defects to be corrected. Troubleshooting procedures for respective items are described in the following paragraphs. Table 7-2 Image Quality Defects List

Description

Item (1) Fog

All or part of image is fogged.

(2) Uneven image density

The image density is not uniform in the same print.

(3) Fluctuation of image density

The image density is instable among prints.

among prints (4) Low image density

The image density is low.

(5) Lacking (partial)

A part of the image is lost.

(6) Poor image reproduction

When the pattern is reproduced, the defect such as lacking is generated.

(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak)

The image is lost in the form of horizontal streak.

(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)

The image is lost in the form of vertical streak.

(9) Black stripe on print

Black stripes are printed on the paper partially or entirely.

(10) Black stripe (horizontal)

Several black horizontal stripes are printed on the paper.

(11) Black stripe (vertical)

Several black vertical stripes are printed on the paper.

(12) Black banding (vertical)

Black bands are printed on the paper.

(13) Black spot

Black spots are generated.

(14) Unfixed toner

When the image is rubbed, the toner is separated from the paper.

(15) Registration defect

The printed image is shifted vertically or horizontally.

(16) Image slanting

The image is printed slantingly.

(17) Blank copy

No image is printed on the paper.

(18) Image overlap

The same image is printed in duplicate.

(19) Skip

The section that should be reproduced horizontally is not generated.

(20) Smear

Duplicated or smeary image is generated.

(21) Solid

The paper is printed in complete black instead of image.

7-7

(1) Fog Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method The image is fogged entirely or partially. ◆ Print engine test patterns. The background is fogged.

Cause

Measure

1. The developer blade suffers from poor charging performance for reason(s) shown below. ◆ The blade is worn/damaged. ◆ The magnet roller surface is soiled/damaged. ◆ The DV spacers on both sides of the magnet roller are worn/damaged, or contact surfaces on both ends of the drum are damaged/worn. ◆ The DV spacers are faulty. ◆ The drum surface that contacts the DV spacers is faulty.

Take the following action(s) depending on the cause identified. ◆ Clean or replace the blade. ◆ Clean or replace the magnet roller. ◆ Check the magnet roller surface and, if damaged, replace the roller.

2.

The contact spring of the developer unit is in imperfect 2. contact.

Check the contact spring of the developer unit. Replace the spring if necessary.

3.

The charge unit is being discharged by itself or to other 3. parts/materials.

Check the operating condition of the charge unit. (Turn on the charge unit , maintenance code "01") Replace the unit if necessary.

4.

4. ◆ The drum is soiled or degraded. ◆ The drum is photodegraded (the drum is exposed to the lighting system and the like).

◆ Replace the process cartridge. ◆ When the process cartridge was exposed to fluorescent lamps for 10 minutes, leave it in the dark place for about 12 hours to restore the optical performance.

1.

7-8

◆ Replace the spacers if damaged.

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

Cause

Measure

5. The charge elimination LED suffers from imperfect 5. Check the charge elimination LED for turn-on. lighting or soiling. (maintenance "05") Clean the LED. 6. Unspecified toner is used.

6. Instruct the user to use only the specified toner. Clean the entire developer unit.

7. ◆ The output of the charge unit is high or low. ◆ The charge unit is imbalanced between left and right.

7. ◆ Measure the current on the charge unit monitor terminal CH1 of the high-voltage power unit. See Section 9.1.1. ◆ Check the charge unit roller 1 for wear, damage, and soiling. Replace it if necessary.

8. The bias output of the developer unit is high or low.

8. ◆ Adjust the developer unit bias. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3. ◆ Check CBL22 of the developer unit bias for connection.

9. The separator is not discharging the electricity.

9. ◆ Check the data accessed with the code "04." ◆ Adjust the separation unit bias. See Section 9.1.5.

10. The toner is fed too much. 10. Replace the magnet roller, as well as DV spacers at both ◆ The space between drum and roll becomes short due to ends of the roller. worn DV spacers.

7-9

(2) Uneven image density Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆ Print engine test patterns. The density and line thickness are nonuniform on a place-byplace basis.

Cause

Measure

1.

The bias output of the developer unit is low or the contact 2. spring is in imperfect contact.

◆ Check the bias output of the developer unit. (maintenance "02") ◆ Check the contact spring for contact condition.

2.

The developer blade is worn entirely or partially.

3.

◆ When the blade has been used to output more than 80000 sheets, replace it. ◆ When the blade is remarkably worn, replace it.

3.

The LED head and lens are soiled.

4.

Clean the LED head and lens.

4.

The drum is soiled or degraded.

5.

Replace the process cartridge.

5.

The magnet roller is worn.

6.

Replace the magnet roller.

6.

The photosensitive drum is not grounded completely.

7.

Check the drum for grounding. ◆ Check the frame leaf spring. ◆ Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.

7.

The toner is not fed uniformly due to worn magnet roller. 8.

◆ Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the thickness of the toner layer is substantially fluctuating, replace the roller.

8.

The luminous strobe width of the LED head is improperly set.

9.

◆ Check the maintenance code "731" to "733" data. Check the luminous energy indicated on the LED head to verify the luminous strobe width can generate the energy. If the strobe width is not properly set, adjust it. See Section 9.3. ◆ If the trouble is not removed, enter the strobe width larger than the setting to recheck the machine condition.

9.

The remaining toner is short.

10. Check the toner amount sensor (TS01) and refill the toner.

10. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the 11. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller. developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.

7-10

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(3) Fluctuation of image density among prints Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the same test pattern is continuously printed on several sheets, the image density is different among those printouts.

Cause

Measure

1.

The drum is soiled or degraded.

1.

2.

The bias output of the developer unit is incorrect.

◆Check the bias output of the developer unit. (maitenancecode 09) Adjust the bias output according to the result. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3. ◆Check the contact spring for contact condition.

3.

The toner is short due to worn magnet roller. (This trouble 3. is prone to occur at high print rate.)

Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the toner layer is thin or the layer is not formed, replace the roller.

4.

The electrification capacity of the toner is decreased due 4. to worn or damaged magnet roller. (This trouble is prone to occur at high print rate.)

Check the blade. Clean or replace the blade. (If the number of output sheets has exceeded the value defined as blade service life, replace the blade.)

5.

Unspecified toner is used.

Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.

5.

Clean or replace the process cartridge.

7-11

(4) Low image density Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆The density of the copied image is low. The line width equivalent to 3 dots is thin.

Cause

Measure

1.

The LED head and lens are soiled.

1.

Clean the LED head and lens.

2.

The drum is degraded.

2.

Replace the process cartridge.

3.

The LED duty is low.

3.

Check the LED duty (maintenance code "731," "732," "733"). See Section 9.3 for the standard value.

4.

The developer blade is worn.

4.

Replace the developer blade.

5.

The bias output of the developer unit is low.

5.

◆Check the developer bias voltage. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3. ◆Check the developer spring for contact.

6.

The charge unit discharges electricity excessively.

6.

Check the discharge level (maintenance code "01"). Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal CH1) See Section 9.1.1.

7.

The transfer unit discharges the electricity faulty.

7.

◆Check the charge wire (2) for looseness. ◆Clean the charge wire (2). ◆Check the transfer unit for installation condition. Check the discharge level of the transfer unit (maintenance code "03"). Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal CH3) See Section 9.1.4.

8.

The drum is not grounded completely.

8.

Check the drum for grounding. ◆Check the frame leaf spring. ◆Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.

9.

Unspecified toner is used.

9.

Instruct the user.

10. The developing clearance is increased due to soiled or 10. ◆Check the DV spacers. scratched DV spacers. ◆Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.

7-12

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(5) Lacking (partial)

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆A part of the image is not printed.

Cause

Measure

1.

The paper is dampened.

1.

◆Replace the paper. ◆Instruct the user.

2.

The toner is short or unevenly charged.

2.

◆Refill the toner. ◆If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor. ◆While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.

3.

The drum is degraded or soiled.

3.

Replace the process cartridge. Cleaning photodegrades the drum. So, wait until the photodegradation is no longer observed.

4.

The transfer unit discharges the electricity faulty.

4.

◆Check the charge wire (2) for looseness. ◆Check the transfer unit for installation condition. ◆Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance code "03"). ◆Check the current consumption at the high-voltage power unit terminal CH3. See Section 9.1.4.

5.

The paper does not contact the drum completely during 5. the transfer process due to faulty paper feed such as skew.

◆Check the clearance between drum bottom and the transfer guide plate. ◆For the skew, see "No. 5" in Section 7.2.1.

6.

Correct pressure is not applied due to deformed developer 6. blade.

Replace the developer blade.

7.

The magnet roller surface is scratched or worn.

7.

Replace the magnet roller.

8.

The DV spacers are damaged.

8.

◆Check the DV spacers. ◆Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.

9.

Bits are missing.

9.

Conduct the corrective action specified in "Poor image reproduction." See the next page.

10. The paper path is not parallel.

10. Adjust the installation position of the fixation. See Section 9.4.2

11. The agitator is deformed or incorrectly mounted.

11. Replace the agitator spring.

12. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the 12. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller. developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.

7-13

(6) Poor image reproduction Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method When test patterns are output, patterns are reproduced to some extent but the following troubles are observed. ◆Faulty character ◆Bits are missing. ◆The image is missing in the form of 8-mm wide vertical band. ◆The image is repeated (randomly).

Cause

Measure

1.

The LED head is defective.

1.

Check the LED head for operation.

2.

The high-voltage power unit is incorrectly adjusted.

2.

Adjust the high-voltage power unit. See Section 9.1.

7-14

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak) Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, horizontal streaks are generated, leading to imperfect image.

Cause

Measure

1.

The paper is dampened.

1.

◆Replace the paper. ◆Instruct the user.

2.

The transfer unit discharges the electricity faulty.

2.

◆Check the charge wire (2) for looseness. ◆Check the transfer unit for installation condition. ◆Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance code "03"). ◆Check the load current at the high-voltage power unit terminal CH3. See Section 9.1.4.

3.

The bias of the developer unit suffers from imperfect 3. contact or unstable output.

◆Check the contact developer spring for contact condition. ◆Check the developer bias output (maintenance code "02"). Adjust the bias output. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.

4.

◆The magnet roller is rotation incorrectly.

◆Turn the gears of the developer unit to check the magnet roller for rotation. ◆Check the drive system of developer unit.

◆The drive system (gears) of the developer unit suffers from damage or galling. ◆The DV spacers are damaged or rotation is incorrectly.

4.

◆Check DV spacers for damage. ◆Check the contact surfaces between DV spacers and the drum for deformation and dust adhesion.

7-15

(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, blank space is generated vertically in the form of streak.

Cause

Measure

1.

The paper is dampened.

1.

◆Replace the paper. ◆Instruct the user.

2.

The charge wire 2 is soiled.

2.

Clean or replace the charge wire (2).

3.

The toner is short or unevenly charged.

3.

◆Refill the toner ◆If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor. ◆While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.

4.

The pressure is substantially increased due to deformed 4. developer blade. Foreign materials are mixed into the machine.

Check the developer blade for deformation.

5.

The LED head is faulty.

Check the LED head for operation. ◆If the LED is faulty, replace the head.

6.

A part of the magnet roller is worn or scratched, resulting 6. in short toner feeding.

Check the magnet roller surface. Check whether the toner layer is formed on the surface and, if not, replace the roller.

7.

A soft blocking (coagulation of toner brought by 7. decreased fluidity) occurs in the developer unit due to application of unspecified toner.

Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.

8.

The LED head and lens are soiled.

8.

Clean the LED head and lens.

9.

The LED head does not emit light.

9.

Check the LED head for operation.

5.

10. The charge unit grid is soiled.

10. Clean the grid.

11. The toner on the magnet roller is partially thick.

11. Check whether the developer blade (DV) is scratched and, if so, replace the blade.

7-16

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(9) Black stripe on print

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the engine test pattern is printed, the pattern is not reproduced. Instead, black stripes are generated on the image partially or entirely.

Cause 1.

The defects appear in the form of black or white stripes 1. depending on the type of soiling or defective patterns.

Measure Check the LED head for operation. If the relevant section is turned on, replace the LED head.

7-17

(10) Black stripe (horizontal) Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, black bands are generated on the paper.

Cause

Measure

1.

Charge wire 1 is soiled or foreign materials adhere on the 1. wire.

Replace the process cartridge.

2.

The developer blade is damaged or in imperfect contact. 2.

Replace the developer blade.

3.

The LED head is faulty.

Check the LED head for operation.

4.

There are members or foreign materials that contact the 4. paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat roller.

Check whether there are members or foreign materials that contact the paper.

5.

In the paper path between the drum and the heat roller, the 5. paper is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machine members.

◆Check the heat roller and suction drive systems. ◆Check the evacuation performance and operating condition of the suction fan.

3.

Following lists the outer diameter and perimeter of the roller-related parts. Locate the failed part from cycles of the trouble observed in the print sample, and then replace or clean it. Parts

7-18

Outer diameter (mm)

Perimeter (mm)

Photosensitive drum

60

188

Heat roller

50

157

Backup roller

53

167

Developing sleeve

40

63

LED roller

12

38

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(11) Black stripe (vertical)

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, the image is reproduced but several black stripes, whose width is less than 1 mm, are generated in the paper feed direction.

Cause

Measure

1.

◆The drum is striated. ◆Foreign materials adhere to the drum.

1.

Replace the process cartridge. ◆Check whether there are foreign materials that contact the drum around it. ◆ Check whether the separation finger (OPC) interferes with the drum to scratch the drum.

2.

The heat roller is striated.

2.

Replace the heat roller. ◆Check whether there are foreign materials that contact the roller heat around it.

3.

The bit of the LED is lit.

3.

When the relevant bit of the LED head is not turned off, replace the LED head.

4.

There are members or foreign materials that contact the 4. paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat roller.

Check whether there are members or foreign materials that contact the paper.

5.

In the paper path between drum and heat roller, the paper 5. is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machine members.

◆Check the heat roller and suction drive systems. ◆Check the evacuation performance and operating condition of the suction fan.

6.

The cleaner blade is scratched.

Replace the process cartridge.

6.

7-19

(12) Black banding (vertical) Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, the image is reproduced but several black stripes are generated in the lateral direction (the direction normal to the paper feed direction).

Cause

Measure

1.

The drum is damaged or soiled in the direction parallel 1. to the drum axis. (In this case, the black stripes are generated at the interval of 180 mm.)

Replace the process cartridge. Or clean the drum if soiled.

2.

The toner from the cleaner blade adheres to the drum surface. (In this case, the black stripes are generated at the interval of 180 mm.)

2.

Clean the drum. Or replace the process cartridge

3.

The heat roller surface is scratched.

3.

Check or replace the heat roller.

4.

The magnet roller surface is scratched.

4.

When the magnet roller surface is scratched, replace it.

7-20

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(13) Black spot

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, black spots are generated on the paper.

Cause

Measure

1.

The drum is scratched or soiled. (The black sports are 1. generated at the interval of 180 mm.)

Replace the process cartridge. Or, clean the drum if soiled.

2.

The heat roller surface is scratched or soiled.

Check and clean or replace the heat and backup rollers.

3.

After the drum passes through the bottom of the drum, it 3. contacts the separation finger (OPC).

◆Check and correct the poorly discharging separation unit. (Measure the current at the terminal CH4 of the high-voltage power unit.) See Section 9.1.5. ◆Check the wire for breakage. ◆Check the separation unit for discharging (maintenance code "04"). ◆Check the heat roller and backup rollers for faulty rotation. ◆Check the belt (TRANS) for expansion and slip.

4.

The toner is dropping from the separation finger (OPC) 4. and cleaner.

◆Clean the separation finger (OPC) and cleaner. ◆Check the separation finger (OPC). Replace if necessary.

5.

The magnet roller surface is scratched to cause a leak 5. between the developer bias and the drum.

◆Check the magnet roller surface for scratches. If it is damaged, replace the roller. ◆Check the bias output of the developer unit (maintenance code "02"). Adjust the bias output according to the result. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.

6.

The charge wire (2) is loosened.

Replace the charge wire (2).

2.

6.

7-21

(14) Unfixed toner

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆If the copied characters and image are rubbed with hands, they are easily separated from the paper.

Cause

Measure

1.

The paper is defective.

1.

◆Replace the paper. ◆Instruct the user.

2.

The heat roller is scratched or deformed.

2.

◆Replace the roller.

3.

The backup roller pressure is short.

3.

Check and adjust the nip pressure (maintenance code "07," 08," "09" ). For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.1.

7-22

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(15) Registration defect

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, registrations are shifted vertically or horizontally.

Cause

Measure

1.

Vertical shift: The registrations are adjusted incorrectly. 1.

Adjust the top edge registration (maintenance code "01"). For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.6.

2.

Vertical shift: The registration clutch CL04 is slippery or 2. galled.

Replace the clutch (registration) CL04.

3.

Horizontal shift: The side registrations are adjusted 3. incorrectly.

Adjust the side registrations. (maintenance code "02." for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.7)

4.

Vertical shift: The registration torque limiter is faulty.

Replace the torque limiter.

4.

7-23

(16) Image slanting

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed on the slant.

Cause

Measure

The paper is not loaded correctly.

2.

The paper feed roller nonuniformly contacts the paper. 2. Or, the roller is nonuniformly worn.

◆Replace the paper feed roller.

3.

The registration roller nonuniformly contacts the pinch 3. roller. Or, either or both rollers are nonuniformly worn.

◆Replace the registration and pinch rollers.

4.

The cutaway roller suffers from nonuniform contact or 4. wear.

◆Replace the cutaway roller.

5.

The fixation is not mounted at the correct position.

5.

◆Adjust the fixation mounted position. See section 9.4.2.

6.

The nip pressure of the heat roller is improperly adjusted. 6. Or, the pressure is imbalanced.

◆Adjust the nip pressure. (maintenance code "07," "08," "09," for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.1.)

7-24

1.

◆Reload the paper. ◆Instruct the user.

1.

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(17) Blank copy

Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed on the slant.

Cause

Measure

1.

The toner is run out.

1.

Refill the toner. ◆While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface for roughness. ◆If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor.

2.

There is no bias output on the developer unit.

2.

◆Check the bias output of the developer unit. (maintenance code "02") ◆Check the developer unit contact spring for contact condition. ◆If there is no output, adjust the developer unit bias. For adjustment procedures, see Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.

3.

The transfer unit is not discharging the electricity.

3.

Check the charge wire (2) for disconnect. ◆Check the output of the transfer unit. (maintenance code "03", for adjustment procedures, see Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.)

4.

The LED head is faulty. (Solid black copy or black stripes 4. are observed depending on the test patterns.)

Check the LED head for operation.

5.

The drum is not grounded correctly.

5.

Check the drum for grounding. ◆Check the frame leaf spring. ◆Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.

6.

The agitator spring is not mounted correctly.

6.

Mount the agitator spring correctly. Replace it if deformed.

7.

The developer unit drive system is damaged. Or, the 7. developer motor is not rotated.

Check the drive wheel unit. Replace it if damaged.

7-25

(18) Image overlap Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆The image remains on the drum and resultantly the same image is printed on the paper.

Cause

Measure

1.

The cleaner blade suffers from imperfect contact (due to 1. hardening or wear).

◆Check the cleaner blade for contact condition. Replace it if necessary. ◆The blade is hardened at low temperatures.

2.

The charge elimination LED is not turned on.

2.

Check the deelectrification LED for operation. (maintenance code "05," "06")

3.

The heat roller is offset.

3.

◆Clean the heat roller.

4.

When the exposure drum is photodegraded with the toner 4. image adhered to it, the image overlap defect occurs.

Leave the process cartridge in a dark place for about 12 hours.

5.

The drum is aged or degraded.

Replace the process cartridge.

7-26

5.

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(19) Skip Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, a part of the grid pattern is not reproduced (in the horizontal direction).

Cause

Measure

1.

The DV spacers of the developer unit are not rotated 1. correctly. Or, the spacer surface is soiled or scratched.

◆Replace the DV spacers. ◆Check whether the surfaces that contact the DV spacers are deformed.

2.

Gears on both edge of the drum are deformed.

2.

Check both gears for damage.

3.

The magnet roller is not rotated correctly.

3.

◆Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth rotation of the magnet roller. ◆Check whether the DV spacers on both edge of the magnet roller are damaged.

4.

The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly 4. due to damaged gears.

◆Clean the cleaner. ◆Turn the gear to check whether the drum is operated smoothly.

5.

The paper is dampened.

◆Replace the paper. ◆Instruct the user.

6.

The drum surface suffers from soiling or dust adhesion. 6.

5.

Clean the drum, or replace the process cartridge.

7-27

(20) Smear Print sample

Trouble symptom and check method ◆When the test pattern is printed, duplicated or smeary image is generated on the grid pattern. ◆Horizontal lines are duplicated or smeared.

Cause

Measure

1.

The gears and paper feed system are damaged.

1.

Replace the gears.

2.

The magnet roller is not rotated correctly.

2.

◆Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth rotation of the magnet roller. ◆Check whether the tracking rollers on both edge of the magnet roller are damaged.

3.

The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly 3. due to damaged gears.

Replace the process cartridge.

4.

The cutter is not working correctly.

4.

◆Check the paper path mechanism.

5.

The fixation is not mounted at the appropriate position.

5.

Adjust the position of the fixation. For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.2.

6.

In the paper path system, there are some obstacles that 6. hinder the paper feed.

7-28

Check the paper path system.

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

(21) Solid black Is the pattern image identifiable? Y N Is the charge wire working? (Check the load current of the charger. See Section 9.1.1) Y

N ◆ Check the CBL21 for its connection and short.

Is a blank space observed at the top or bottom edge of the print? Y N ◆ Check the charger and surroundings for short. (Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section 6.3.1(6).) ◆ Adjust the load current of the charger. see Section 9.1.1. ◆ Check the LED head for operation. If necessary, replace the LED head. ◆ Check the load current of the charger. See Section 9.1.1. ◆ Check the charger and surroundings for short (Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section 6.3.1(6).) ◆ Check the bias output of the developer. (maintenance code "02", for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.1.2 and 9.1.3)

7-29

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

Chapter 8

Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

This chapter describes how to disassemble and assemble the device when it is necessary to replace the parts.

8.1

How to Read This Manual

8.1.1

Rules for Disassembly/Assembly This Section defines several rules used in the part replacement (disassembly/assembly) procedures. Note: Before disassembling the intended section, examine and comprehend the complete installation condition. This allows you to assemble the device smoothly. Before replacing a part, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the power cable from the power outlet. To protect the photosensitive material from degradation, be sure to close the upper cover whenever unnecessary. Removal :

Shows the disassembling procedures. Note that some procedures are detailed in illustrations. Installation : Shows the assembling procedures. Since the device is assembled by executing the disassembling procedures reversely, only precautions are described in the assembling procedures. Direction : Positions and directions (including those of engine interior) described in the procedures are defined as follows (see Figure 8-1). ◆ Front : Front panel of the device ◆ Right : Right panel of the device when viewed from the front ◆ Left : Left panel of the device when viewed from the front ◆ Rear : Rear panel of the device

8-1

8.1.2

Covers Figure 8-1 shows the nomenclatures of the covers attached to the device.

Front cover Top cover

Manual feed cover

Right upper cover FDL cover Front cover 2

Filter cover 1

Roll 1 door Filter cover 2 Roll 2 door Waste toner door FDR cover

Buffer door

Left upper cover 1

Cutter door Rear cover 1

Rear cover 2

Figure 8-1 Nomenclatures of Covers

8-2

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2

Replacing the Parts

8.2.1

Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board)

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)

Right upper cover

2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) Left upper cover

8-3

3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs)

Front cover 2

4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each)

FDL cover FDR cover

5 Disconnect the connector provided on both side of the device. Connector on the left side of the device

8-4

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

White connector CN5A (13 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector CN5B (8 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector CN6A (9 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector CN6B (14 pins, Red and black stripes) Secondary power supply translucent connector (4 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and black stripes) Secondary power supply translucent connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes) * More connectors are used on the FM model. White connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes) Blue connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes) Secondary power supply blue connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)

Connector on the right side of the device:

White connector CN1A (12 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector CN1B (10 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector CN3A (13 pins, Red and black stripes) White connector CN4A (11 pins, Red and black stripes) Blue connector CN3B (10 pins, Red and black stripes) Blue connector CN4B (11 pins, Red and black stripes) Primary power supply connector (2 pins, Black and white stripes) Primary power supply connector (4 pins, Black and white stripes) Secondary power supply connector (2 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and brown stripes) Secondary power supply connector C105 (6 pins, Orange and brown stripes) High-voltage power supply connector (Red stripes) 4

8-5

6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the connectors. Left side of the device:

Right side of the device:

7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each)

8-6

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box.

Electrical box

9 Remove the cable clamp (2 clamps on MF model) (2 set screws) and the cable to take out the electrical box.

Cable clamp (for MF alone)

Cable clamp

0 Remove the board cover (set screw 8 pcs)

8-7

A Remove the MRC2 board. (set screw 8 pcs) As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 set screws)

(As for MF model)

MSC2 board

B Remove EEPROM and transfer it to the new board.

EEPROM

8-8

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.2

Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A

Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3. Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4. Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5. Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6. Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7. Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8. Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9. Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0. Remove the USB board. (set screw 4 pcs and connector 1 pc.)

8-9

8.2.3

Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A

Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3. Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4. Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5. Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the connectors. See Section 8.2.16. Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7. Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8. Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9. Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0. Remove the MEC board. (set screw 6 pcs and connector 5 pcs) As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 set screws)

NVRAM

B Remove NVRAM and transfer it to the new board.

8-10

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.4

Replacing the Controller Fan

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3. 4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4. 5 Unplug connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5. 6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6. 7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7. 8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8. 9 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9. 0 Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0. A Remove the fan. (set screw 2 pcs) Controller fan

8-11

8.2.5

Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor

1 Remove the cutter door. (set screw 4 pcs)

Cutter door

2 Remove the connector (1 pc each) and set screw (1 pc each) from disconnect the paper size sensor and paper jam sensor.

8-12

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.6

Replacing the Cutter Unit

Note: Be sure to turn the main power switch off before starting replacement, because cutter replacement work involves connection and disconnection of the connector. Make sure that the connectors are correctly connected before operation, because if the power is turned on when the connector is improperly connected, the device will not start properly. Be careful during the work to prevent personal injury. The cutter is bare not protected with a cover. Main power switch

Moving blade

Fixed blade

1 Draw out roll 1 door. (1st stage alone) Open the roll 1 door somewhat so that it may not interfere with removal of the cutter unit.

Roll 1 door

2 Remove the cutter cover. (Set screws 4 pcs)

8-13

3 Remove the rear cover 2. (Set screws 4 pcs) Cutter cover

Rear cover 2

8-14

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

4 Unplug the connector Note Use care when removing the connector so that the receiving side pin may not be bent. 1. Remove the connectors for the cutter motor and the paper size sensor from connectors CN27 and CN28 on RFU board, and then place them on the feed board box. 2. Remove the connectors wired from the low-pressure power supply on the device body, feed pulse motor and MEC board from connectors CN21, CN22 and CN29. Then pull them out from the side face of the feed board box and fix them on the sheet metal with a piece of tape. (Remove the cable from the device body since it interferes with removal of the cutter unit.) Fix them using tape to protect them from damage.

Pull it upward

Pull it sideways Cable being led from the device body Cable of cutter unit

5 Remove the cutter center supporting sheet metal (Screws: 2 pcs)

Cutter center supporting sheet metal

8-15

6 Remove the cutter guide supporting sheet metal (Set screws 4 pcs) This sheet metal is provided at the bottom of the device. Reasonable care is needed in its removal since it is somewhat difficult to remove and can be easily dropped and lost.

Pin (Pin on the opposite side is provided on the backside of the motor)

The cutter unit is fitted to the pins on the device body. So remove the pins first. Reasonable care must be exercised in the removal not to drop it inadvertently. (The same holds true for the installation.) For details of the work, see the following "Cutter Unit Removal Procedure".

Note Don't remove all screws at one time. Otherwise, the cutter might fall off. Be sure to support the cutter while removing the screws.

Tilt the cutter unit somewhat and then pull it out straight.

Be sure to tilt the cutter unit. Otherwise, the motor bottom can damage the wiring harness. Tilt and then pull it out gradually.

Removed parts Screws Covers Small part

8-16

: 14 pcs : Rear cover 2 and cutter cover 1 pcs for each : Cutter center supporting sheet metal 1 pcs

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

1 Install the replacing cutter. (Set screws 6 pcs) Install the cutter in the procedure reverse to the removal.

1. Tilt the cutter somewhat and then install it straight. Like in the removal, use care not to damage the cable on the bottom of the cutter motor. When fixing the unit with the screws, hold the unit with hand while taking care not to lose the screws.

2. Fit the cutter unit to the pins on the device body. 3. After fitting to the pins, fix the cutter unit with the screws.

Cutter center supporting sheet metal Position of the screws for the cutter center supporting sheet metal depends on the given model.

Butt position

For 1- or 2-stage feed

8-17

2 Plug the connector. 1. Lead in the cutter motor connector and the paper size sensor connector of the cutter unit through the top and insert them to connectors CN27 and CN28 on the RFU board.

2. Lead in the connectors from the low-voltage power supply on the device body, feed pulse motor and MEC board through the side face and then insert to connectors CN21, CN22 and CN29 on RFU board.

Use care so that cables may not be caught with surrounding parts.

3 Install the cutter cover and rear cover 2, and then close the roll 1 door. (Set screws 8 pcs)

Cutter cover

Rear cover 2

Roll 1 door

4 Turn on the main power switch and proceed to adjustment of the cut length accuracy. It is a must to confirm the normal operation of the device and to adjust squareness of the cut. For adjustment of squareness of the cut, see 9.4.3 of this document.

8-18

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.7

Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3. 4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4. 5 Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5. 6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6 7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 3 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7. 8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8. 9 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9. 0 Unplug the all connectors from the high voltage power unit. A Remove the high voltage power unit. (set screw 9 pcs)

High-voltage power supply unit Remove the cable and then install on the new high-voltage power supply unit.

8-19

8.2.8

Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3. 4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4. 5 Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5. 6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6. 7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 3 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7. 8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8. 9 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9. 0 Unplug the all connectors from the low voltage power unit. A Remove the low voltage power unit. (set screw 6 pcs)

Low-voltage power supply unit The screw is not provided in this portion on the low-voltage power supply models with the improved sturdiness against damages.

8-20

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.9

Replacing the Power Switch

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Unplug the power switch connectors.

Power switch connectors

3 Remove the bracket that secures the power switch and remove the switch. (set screw 2 pcs)

8-21

8.2.10 Replacing the Filter

1 Remove the filter cover 1 or filter cover 2. 2 Remove respective filters.

Filter cover 1

Filter cover 2

8-22

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.11 Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor.

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the waste toner bottle.

Waste toner bottle

3 Remove the sheet metals. (Set screws 2 pcs for each sheet metal) When removing TS02 sensor, remove the sheet metal on MS05 switch first and then remove the sheet metal on TS02 sensor.

Sheet metal on TS02 sensor

Sheet metal on MS05 sensor

4 Remove MS05 switch or TS02 sensor. (Set screws 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs for each)

TS02 sensor

MS05 switch

8-23

8.2.12 Replacing the Fixation Unit

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 7 pcs)

Front cover

4 Remove cover (FDL) and cover (FDR). (Set screws 1 pcs for each)

Cover (FDL) Cover (FDR)

5 Remove the manual feed drawer. (Set screws 2 pcs)

Manual feed drawer

8-24

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

6 Pull and remove the manual feed tray.

Manual feed tray

7 Remove the connectors on the right side of the device. (1 connector for fan, 1 connector for temperature fuse, 1 connector for halogen lamp, 2 connectors for thermister, 1 connector for each of MS06-1 and MS06-2 and 1 connector for PS07.) Connector for fan

MS06-1 (Blue)

Connector for temperature fuse (Yellow)

Connector for halogen lamp Connector for

Connector for thermister (White)

thermister (Red)

MS06-2 (White) Connector for PS07

8-25

8 Remove the fan unit. (Set screws 5 pcs)

Fan unit

9 Remove MS06 unit. (Set screws 1 pcs)

MS06 unit

8-26

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

0 Remove the fixation unit motor. (Set screws 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs)

Fixation unit motor

Connector

A Remove 1 set screw of the fixing sheet metal for the alignment adjusting screw.

Alignment adjusting screw Set screw for fixing sheet metal

B Loosen 4 sets screws on both sides of the fixation unit.

8-27

C Pull out the right side of the fixation unit by the length equal to the slot in the setscrew section for the fixation unit. Pull it out by this length.

Pull it out by this length.

D Make sure the fixing sheet metal is detached from the device. Remove the fixing sheet plate and the alignment adjusting screw by turning the alignment adjusting screw. Alignment adjusting screw

Fixing sheet metal

E Push back the right side of the fixation unit and then move the wiring harness for the halogen lamp, thermister and temperature fuse toward the right side of the fixation unit (from the outside of the right side plate to its inside). Move the wiring harness of PS07 to the outside of the right side plate. F Remove the fixation unit. (Set screws 4 pcs)

Fixation unit

8-28

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8-29

8.2.13 Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY

1 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 4 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 2 Open the clamshell.

Clamshell

Process cartridge

3 4 5 6

Remove the process cartridge. Remove the transcription separator. See Section 8.2.23. Unplug the connector (motor part 2 pcs) Loosen the bolt on the tension drum plate, move the plate to the left, and retighten the screw to set the plate.

Boss (wound)

Pulley (64)

Tension drum plate set screw

Timing drum (belt)

The connector of procedure 5

8-30

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

7 8 9 0

Remove the timing drum (belt). Remove the boss (wound). (hexagon socket set screw 2 pcs) Remove the pulley (64). Remove the boss stopper. (hexagon socket set screw 2 pcs)

Boss stopper

A Remove the drum gear. B Remove the support (left drum). (inner set screw 2 pcs, outer set screw 1 pc) Support (left drum)

Drum gear

8-31

C Remove the wheel unit. (set screw 4 pcs) This screw is longer than others. Use care in the installation not to mistake it for others (Printed as LS on the sheet metal).

Clutch assembly

Clutch assembly

Wheel unit

D Unplug the connector from each clutch ASSY (2 pcs). (1 pc each) E Remove the clutch ASSY.

8-32

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.14 Replacing the Main Motor

1 Remove the wheel unit. See Section 8.2.13. 2 Remove the tension spring.

Tension spring

3 Loosen the four set screws and move up and down the main motor, loosen the timing belt.

Main motor

4 Remove the main motor. (set screw 4 pcs)

8-33

8.2.15 Replacing the Transport (suction).

1 Remove the right upper cover. (Set screws 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2. 3 Remove the process cartridge. See Section 8.2.13 3. 4 Remove the transfer separator. (equipped with a hook at the right.)

Transfer separator

5 Unplug the two connectors from the transport ASSY.

Connector (Blue)

Connector (White)

8-34

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

6 Remove the transport ASSY. (set screw, left/right 1 pc each) Note: Care must be exercised in removing the transport ASSY so that PS06 may not be broken.

Transport ASSY

Connector

8-35

8.2.16 Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit

1 Remove the fuser unit. See Section 8.2.12. 2 Unplug connectors from both sides of the halogen lamp and remove the right and left fuser holders. (set screw 1 pc each)

Fuser holder (left)

Fuser holder (right)

3 Remove the stopper (heat roll). 4 Pull out the halogen lamp. Note: Pay attention not to touch the transparent glass of the halogen lamp during the work. If you touch the glass, wipe it with a rag dampened with alcohol.

Note When installing, fit the halogen lamp securely. Don't leave it in loosened state. After replacement, adjust the alignment again. -> 9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack

8-36

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.17 Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan)

1 Remove the transport. See Section 8.2.15. 2 Unplug the connector, 3 Remove the fan. (set screw 2 pcs, connector 1 pc)

Connector

Cut off this portion for older models (it interferes with the sheet metal in the rear side).

8-37

8.2.18 Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2 3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 9 pcs) * 7 pcs in Rev. D 4 Remove the fan unit. (set screw 5 pcs, fan connector 1 pc) See Section 8.2.12 8 * If it is bundled with Insulock tie, cut Insulock tie. 5 Remove the fixation cover. (set screw 3 pcs)

6 Unscrew the set screws and remove the thermistors. This thermister is connected to the red connector. Enlarged figure

Note: Plug the red connectors in the left thermistor shown in the picture above. Note: If the fan unit was bundled with Insulock tie, bundle it likewise in installation, too. 8-38

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.19 Replacing the Fan on Fuser

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 9 pcs) See Section 8.2.12 3. * 7 pcs in Rev. D 4 Unplug the connector. (1 pc each) 5 Remove the fan. (set screw, 2 pcs each)

8-39

8.2.20 Replacing the Charger Fan

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2. 4 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs) 5 Close the clamshell. 6 Remove the plate spring and bracket clamshell (2 pcs each). (Set screws 1 pc on each side)

Plate spring (it is tightened together with the bracket clamshell)

Enlarged view

Plate spring

8-40

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

7 Open the clamshell. * Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it. 8 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (set screws 3 pcs and connector 1 pc) See Section 8.2.24.

Charge elimination ASSY

9 Remove the fan. ( set screw 2 pcs each) (connector 1 pc)

Note When closing the clamshell after replacing the fan, care must be used to prevent the ferrite core bumping against the developer unit.

8-41

8.2.21 Replacing the Process Unit

1 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2. 2 Pull out and remove the process unit.

Process unit

8-42

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.22 Replacing the LED Head • In the case of PL model

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2. 4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 8.2.21 2. 5 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs) 6 Close the clamshell. 7 Remove the two plate springs and the two bracket clamshells. (set screw left/right 1 pc each.)

Plate spring (it is tightened together with the bracket clamshell)

Enlarged view

Plate spring

8-43

8 Open the clamshell. * Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it. 9 Unplug the three connectors of LED head.

0 Remove the right and left move guides. (set screw 2 pcs each) Guide (MOVE)

A Remove the LED head Note: After the replacement of LED head, the LED head joint must be adjusted. For details, see Section 9.6 "Adjusting the LED Head Joint."

8-44

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

• In the case of MF model

1 Remove the developer unit 2 Install the pinch unit. (Set screw 4 pcs) To install the pinch unit easier, change the screw position on the side to keep the clamshell open.

Change the screw position

Pinch unit

3 Remove the cable of the LED head. Close the clamshell and then remove the LED head cable through the device back face.

8-45

4 Remove the LED head. (Set screws 4 pcs) Return the screw being moved in step 2 to the original position and then fully open the clamshell. Remove LED-MOVE on both sides and then take out the LED head. Care must be exercised in removing LED-MOVE so that the LED head may not be inadvertently dropped.

Restore the original screw position

1 Install LED-HEAD and fix it with LED-MOVE of both sides. 2 Close the clamshell and then connect 4 LED head cables through the back face. 3 Remove the pinch unit. Modify the fixing position on both sides and then partially open the clamshell. Remove the pinch unit. (Set screws 4 pcs) 4 Install the developer unit. Note Don't fully open the clamshell while the developer unit is removed. Otherwise, FR4 and FR5 can be disengaged. Be sure that the pinch unit has been installed before opening the clamshell fully. 8-46

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.23 Replacing the Transfer Separator

1 Remove the process unit. 2 Remove the transfer separator by unlatching the two hooks.

Installation Note: Check the transfer separator is correctly fixed to the specified position. Note: Whenever installing the transfer separator, be sure to insert its left side first.

8-47

8.2.24 Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED)

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2. 4 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs) 5 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (Set screws 3 pcs and connector 1 pc)

Charge elimination ASSY

8-48

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.25 Replacing the Developer

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2. 3 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2. 4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 8.2.21 2. 5 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs each) 6 Close the clamshell. 7 Change fixing positions of right and left stoppers.

8-49

8 Unplug the connector.

Connnector

9 Open the buffer door.

Buffer door

0 Open the clamshell. A Remove the registration pinch frame.(set screw 4 pcs)

Registration pinch frame

8-50

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

B Remove the clamped cable.

The cable is clamped on the backside of this portion.

C Remove the rear cover. (set screw 5 pcs) Rear cover

D Remove the left DEV angle and right DEV angle. (set screw 1 pc each)

Left DEV angle

Right DEV angle

E Remove the developer.

8-51

8.2.26 Replacing the Developer DV Spacer

1 Remove the developer. 2 Remove the stopper and wave washer from the developer right side. (set screw 2 pcs) Stopper

Wave washer

3 Remove the gear from the developer left side. 1. Remove the E-ring of gear (idler 2) . 2. Remove the gear (idler 2). 3. Remove the gear (idler 1). 4. Remove the E-ring of gear (magnet roll). 5. Remove the gear (magnet roll). 6. Remove the screw (2 pcs). 7. Remove the bearing.

Bearing Gear (idler 1)

Gear (idler 1)

Screw DV spacer

E-ring of gear (idler 2)

E-ring of gear (magnet roll)

4 Remove the DV spacer. 1. Remove the gear (magnet roll). 2. Remove the DV spacer.

Note: The gear (magnet roll) has front and back faces. Mount the gear with its light-blue face. 8-52

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.27 Replacing the Developer Blade Note: The toner may spill out during the work. Lay the cover such as newspaper on the floor.

1 Remove the magnet roller. See Section 8.2.26 4.

Place the removed magnet roller as shown in the picture. 2 Remove the developer blade. 1. Remove the left and right screws (total 2 pcs) from the blade holder.

2. Remove the blade together with the holder. 3. Loosen the set screw from the blade plate.

4. Remove the blade.

8-53

Note: After a new blade is mounted to the blade holder, apply the toner to the blade tip.

Apply the toner over the entire blade tip.

Before installing the blade assembly, remove the toner from the magnet roller and developer chassis using a vacuum cleaner.

Remove the toner from the developer chassis.

8-54

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.28 Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch)

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Open the clamshell. 3 Remove the INT1. 1. Unplug the connector. 2. Disconnect the INT1.

INT1

8-55

8.2.29 Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch)

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Open the buffer door. (remove the two thumb screws.)

Buffer door

3 Disconnect the INT3. 4 Remove the bracket (INT3) (set screw 2 pcs)

5 Remove the INT3.

INT3

8-56

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.30 Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor

1 Open the buffer door. 2 Open the clamshell. 3 Remove the registration pinch frame. See Section 8.2.25 0. 4 Unplug the connector and remove the PS05.

8-57

8.2.31 Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor

1 Pull out the manual feed tray.

2 Unplug the connector and remove the PS15.(set screw 1 pc)

8-58

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.32 Replacing the Control Panel

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1. 2 Remove the control panel. 1. Unplug the connector. 2. Remove the two set screws.

8-59

8.2.33 Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02)

(Procedures shown below are common to upper, middle, and lower trays.) 1 Remove the roll paper feed unit: 1. Pull out the roll door. 2. Remove the roll paper feed unit. (set screw 4 pcs)

Note: Place the roll paper feed unit with the handle-attached face downward. 2 Remove the motor. 1. Unplug the connector. 2. Remove the two set screws. 3. Remove the motor.

FM01(FM02)

8-60

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

When installing the roll paper feed unit, fix it with screws as shown below. 1 Fix the left side of the roll paper feed unit in 2 positions.

2 Close the roll paper feed unit once and then open it slightly again. Then fix a position in the front right side of the roll paper feed unit with a screw.

3 Open the roll paper feed unit fully and screw-fix a position in the back of the unit.

8-61

8.2.34 Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit (PS11, PS12, PS21, PS22, PS31, and PS32) PS11 ASSY ( Roll 1 paper end sensor 1) PS12 ASSY ( Roll 2 paper end sensor 1) PS21 ASSY ( Roll 1 door switch) PS22 ASSY ( Roll 2 door switch)

1 Pull out the roll 1 and roll 2 doors. 2 Remove PS31 and PS32. Remove PS21 and PS22. Remove PS11 and PS12. 1. Unplug the connector from each sensor. 2. Remove the relevant sensors. When the roll door cover is removed by unscrewing the four set screws and the latch metal is removed by unscrewing the set screw, PS21 and PS22 can easily be removed.

PS11,12

8-62

PS21,22

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring

1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1. 1 2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1. 2 3 Remove the E-ring and set screw, and remove the gas spring. Note When replacing the gas springs, do it one by one starting with the right side (or left side) one. Don't remove the gas springs on both sides at one time.

Gas spring

8-63

8.2.36 Replacing the heat roller

1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 8.2.12. 2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 8.2.16. 3 Remove the stay (motor HM). (Set screws 2 pcs) 4 Remove the ejector (top) assembly. (KL clip 1 pc) Stay (motor HM)

KL clip Ejector (top) assembly 5 Remove the cover (heat roller). (Set screws 2 pcs) 6 Remove the ejector (top) assembly retaining spring. (Retaining spring 1 pc and set screw 1 pc on each side) 7 Remove the paper guide (bottom) assembly. (Set screws 2 pcs)

Cover (heat roller)

Ejector (top) assembly retaining panel

Paper guide (bottom) assembly

8-64

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8 Remove gear (Z35-Z15) and gear (Z19) on the left side of the fixation unit. (E-ring 2 pcs) 9 Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the left side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are engaged with the heat roller) 0 Remove the gear (heat roller). Gear (Z35-Z15) Gear (Z19) Gear (heat roller) Stopper (heat roller)

Gear (Z19)

A Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the right side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are engaged with the heat roller) B Remove the spacer (sleeve). (Right side alone) C Remove the sleeve (heat roller). (1 pc on each side) D Remove the bearing (heat roller). (1 pc on each side) Bearing (heat roller) Sleeve (heat roller)

Spacer (sleeve) Stopper (heat roller)

8-65

E Remove the heat roller.

Note When assembling a new heat roller, clean the entire heat roller surface with HR cleaner.

8-66

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.37 Replacing the backup roller

1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 8.2.12. 2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 8.2.16. 3 Remove the heat roller. See Section 8.2.36. 4 Remove the cover (FU top) assembly. (Set screws 3 pcs)

Cover (FU top) assembly

5 Remove the lever (cam). (Set screw 1 pc) 6 Remove the holder (shaft L) and holder (shaft R). (E-ring 2 pcs on each side)

Backup roller assembly

Holder (shaft R) * Holder (shaft L) is provided on the opposite side (left side)

Lever (cam)

8-67

7 Remove the fame (FU top) assembly. (Set screws 4 pcs. It is allowed to leave the cables on the frame.)

Frame (FU top) assembly

8 Remove the backup roller assembly.

Backup roller assembly

9 Remove C-ring and then remove bearing (backup roller). (2 pcs on each side) 0 Remove the shaft (backup roller).

Bearing (backup roller)

C-ring

Shaft (backup roller)

Note Even if the backup roller may be cooled down, the shat (backup roller) sometimes remains hot. Be careful to avoid burn.

8-68

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2.38 Cleaning Primary Wire

Table 8-1 Maintenance Priority

Black Line Black Belt (Media Feed direction)

Clean WIRE (CHARGER)

Clean BLADE (CHARGER)

Exchange WIRE (CHARGER)

Exchange BLADE (CHARGER)

Exchange Process Cartridge

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

2nd

3rd

Black Spot Black Line (Roll Width Direction)

1st

Fog (Background Cloud)

1st

2nd

3rd

Uneven Image Density

1st

2nd

3rd

White Spot, White Line (Roll Width Direction)

1st

Partial Lacking (Media Feed direction)

1st

2nd 1st

Black Copy

3rd 2nd

• Necessary tools a.Screwdriver (+) b. Swabs c. Ethanol (99.5%) d. Cotton Ciegal

Swabs

Ethanol

Cotton Ciegal

8-69

1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)ASSY). (Two setscrews)

CASE (CHARGER)

2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.

WIRE (CHARGER)

WIRE (CHARGER)

Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs wetted by ethanol.

8-70

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

3 Clean the wire (WIRE(CHARGER)). (1) Prepare two swabs wetted by ethanol. (2) Nip the Wire by two swabs wetted by ethanol. (3) Move the two swabs right and left. Note: a. You may clean the wire even when you have only one swab. See pictures below. b. Be careful not to cut or bend the wire. c. Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs wetted by ethanol. (Example of cleaning by two swabs)

(Example of cleaning by one swab)

4 After cleaning, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two setscrews.

WIRE (CHARGER)

8-71

8.2.39 Exchanging Primary Wire • Necessary tools and part a.Screwdriver (+) b. Tweezers c. Ethanol (99.5%) d. Cotton Ciegal

Cotton Ciegal Ethanol

Tweezers

Cotton ciegal

e. WIRE (CHARGER)

Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs wetted by ethanol. 1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)). (Two setscrews)

CASE (CHARGER)

2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.

WIRE (CHARGER)

8-72

WIRE (CHARGER)

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

3 Detaching tired Primary Wire (1)

Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers, and unhook from support.

(2)

Pick the other side (fixed side) by tweezers, and unhook from support.

8-73

4 Attaching new Primary Wire (1)

Prepare detached SPRING (CHARGER) and new WIRE (CHARGER).

SPRING (CHARGER)

WIRE (CHARGER)

(2)

Pick one terminal of the Wire by tweezers, and hook it onto support.

(3)

Hook another terminal of the Wire with SPRING (CHARGER), and hook it onto support. Note: Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers as below to make the procedure easier.

8-74

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

(4)

Check whether bent or soiled wire has been attached to the process cartridge or not. Note: If the wire is soiled, clean it again. If the wire is bent, replace it again.

WIRE (CHARGER)

(5)

After Exchanging, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two setscrews.

CASE (CHARGER)

Note: Be careful not to bend the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) fixed to the BLADE(CLEANER) with setscrew. Make sure the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) correctly touch to the CASE (CHARGER).

PLATE(CLEANER_FG)

8-75

8.2.40 Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade • Necessary tools a. Screwdriver (+) b. Adjust Gauge : JIGU(CLEANER BLADE) c. Ethanol (99.5%) d. Cotton Ciegal e. Vaccume cleaner for toners

Adjust Gauge

1 Remove five setscrews, and detach BLADE(CLEANER).

BLADE (CLEANER) Five setscrews and two plates

BLADE (CLEANER)

Blade rubber

BLADE (CLEANER)

Aluminum holder

Note: BLADE(CLEANER) consists of an aluminum holder and a blade rubber. Do not touch the blade rubber by hands. If touched, clean the blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol. Vacuum the toner on the blade rubber with the Vacuum cleaner for toners.

8-76

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

2 Wipe blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal. Note: If the blade rubber is strongly soiled, use Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol. If the blade rubber is damaged or cannot be cleaned any more, replace BLADE (CLEANER).

Blade rubber

3 After cleaning, sprinkle new toner for lubrication on the blade rubber. Wipe some toner off from the development sleeve with cotton ciegal.

Brush the blade rubber with the cotton ciegal to spread toner.

Blade rubber

Aluminum holder Blade rubber

Spread toner here. BLADE (CLEANER)

8-77

Note: Do not spread new toner on the blade rubber while blade rubber is wetted right after cleaning by ethanol. Use new toner for spreading on the blade rubber. Do not use waste toner. BLADE(CLEANER)

Waste toner bottle

4 Attach cleaner blade to initial position and fix it with five setscrews. Press the blade against the adjust gauge to fix. Note: Keep just 2mm (0.08 inch) of gap between blade and chassis at left, midleft, center, mid-right and right. Keep space with the adjust gauge and press the blade against the gauge. Fix the blade with screws in the following order: center, mid-left, mid-right, left-end and right-end, or in reverse order as center, mid-right, mid-left, right-end and left-end.

Adjust Gauge BLADE (CLEANER)

2 (+/-0.2) mm 0.08 (+/-0.008) inch

8-78

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

5 After cleaner blade is attached, clean toner around the process cartridge.

BLADE (CLEANER)

8-79

8.2.41 Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum 1 Remove the process cartridge. 2 Place the process cartridge on the table directing its grip downward. 3 Repackage OPC cleaner into a smaller sized container and then apply an appropriate amount of it to a piece soft cloth such as cotton ciegal.

4 Clean the photosensitive drum surface.

8-80

Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

5 Rotate the gear section of the photosensitive drum with hand and then rotate the photosensitive drum in the paper feed direction.

6 Repeat above steps 4 and 5.

8-81

Chapter 9 Adjustment

Chapter 9

Adjustment

This chapter describes how to adjust each part of the engine in this device.

9.1

Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit

Method of adjusting the primary charger load current, developer AC bias, developer DC bias, transfer unit load current, and separator AC bias are described.

9-1

9.1.1

Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current 1 Remove front cover. 2 Insert the tester probes into the CH1 terminals, and operate the primary charger with the maintenance code "01" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to measure the load current Icc of the charging wire. For the measurement, use the DC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read 100 µA for 100 mV. 3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH1 control using a screwdriver for power supply adjustment.

CH1 terminals

Setting range: -865 to -935 µA (Reading of tester = 0.865 to 0.935 V) Target value: -900 µA (Reading of tester = 0.9 V)

9-2

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.1.2

Developer AC Bias 1 Remove front cover. 2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2AC terminals, and operate the developer AC bias with the maintenance code "02" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to measure the AC load current Vdba. For the measurement, use the AC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read 100 V for 100 mV. 3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH2AC control using a screwdriver for power supply adjustment.

CH1 terminals

Setting range: 1.40 to 1.50 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 0.625 to 0.675 V) Target value: 1.45 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 0.65 V)

9-3

9.1.3

Developer DC Bias Note:

The developer DC bias must be adjusted after the developer AC bias was adjusted.

1 Remove front cover. 2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2DC terminals, and operate the developer DC bias with the maintenance code "02" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to measure the DC load current Vdba. For the measurement, use the DC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read 100 V for 100 mV. 3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH2DC adjusting volume using the screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.

CH2DC terminal

Setting range: -270 to -290 V (Reading of tester: 0.27 to 0.29 V) Target value: -280 V (Reading of tester: 0.28 V)

9-4

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.1.4

Transfer Load Current 1 Remove front cover. 2 Insert the tester probes into the CH3 terminals, and operate the transfer with the maintenance code "03" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to measure the load current Itcd of the transfer wire. For the measurement, use the DC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read 100 µA for 100 mV. 3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH3 adjusting volume using the screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.

CH3 terminal

Setting range: 570 to 630 µA (Reading of tester: 0.570 to 0.630 V) Target value: 600 µA (Reading of tester: 0.6 V)

9-5

9.1.5

Separator AC Bias 1 Remove front cover. 2 Insert the tester terminal into the CH4 terminal on the high voltage power unit, use the maintenance code "04" (see Section 2.3.9) of the engine maintenance mode to operate the separator AC bias, and measure the AC load voltage Vdca. On the tester, select the AC voltage measurement position and read 1 V as 1000 V. Note

DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.

3 If the adjustment is needed, turn the CH4 control volume using a flat blade screwdriver, which is specialized for adjustment of power unit, to adjust the voltage.

CH4 terminal

Setting range: 12.0 to 13.0 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 4.3 to 4.7 V) Target value: 12.5 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 4.5 V)

9-6

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.2

Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit

This section covers verification procedures for the voltage of the low-voltage power unit. 1 Remove front cover. 2 According to the voltage you want to check, insert the tester terminal to TP1 to TP4 pins. Voltage value 24 V ± 1.2 V : TP1 (24 V), TP2 (GND) Voltage value 5.1 V ± 0.005 V : TP3 (5.1 V), TP4 (GND) Note

TP4

DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.

TP3

VR71

TP1

TP2

3 When adjustment +5.1 V is needed, do it by turning the adjustment volume (VR71) using the screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.

9-7

9.3

Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head

As each LED head has different light quantity, if the LED head is replaced, the light emitting STB width and the density change width must be set. The LED light quantity label has been attached to the LED head, and therefore set the light emitting STB width and the density change width following the light quantity given on the label. For setting the light emitting STB width and the density change width, select the maintenance code , subcode "731 - 739" in the maintenance mode. For the setting procedure, see 2.3.12. After setting, execute the engine test print (maintenance code ) to check that normal plotting is outputted. Hint: In case of a print quality failure such as uneven density and variations in line thickness, try to set larger STB value than the value listed in the corresponding table. Table 9-1 Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value Average light quantity

STB value

STB width

Average light quantity

STB value

STB width

1.100 1.110 1.120 1.130 1.140 1.150 1.160 1.170 1.180 1.190 1.200 1.210 1.220 1.230 1.240 1.250 1.260 1.270 1.280 1.290 1.300

28 28 28 28 27 27 27 27 26 26 26 26 26 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 24

5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1.310 1.320 1.330 1.340 1.350 1.360 1.370 1.380 1.390 1.400 1.410 1.420 1.430 1.440 1.450 1.460 1.470 1.480 1.490 1.500

24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 21 21 21 21 21

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3

Observing the average light quantity of the LED head, set the HEAD_A, B, C from the above table. Then, perform the test print of "2 by 2" vertically to check that there is no density difference. (If the error diffusion data can be outputted, also print the error diffusion data for checking.) If different, change the STB width of HEAD_A, C to adjust the density. At this time, select the STB width according to the STB value from the following table and enter it.

9-8

STB value

STB width

STB value

STB width

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.4

Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items

The items that do not satisfy the reference values in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure" and other adjustment items are listed in Table 9-2. Referring to the corresponding items in Table 9-2, enter the engine maintenance mode to adjust, or take corrective measures following the reference sections. Table 9-2 Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure Item

Adjustment of fixation nip pressure Adjustment of skew/slackness

Cut squareness

Output Output paper Control length for width for (adjustment) item adjustment adjustment Pressure of the 400 mm A0 pressure roller

Output paper type for adjustment

Print engine test pattern

Normal paper

No.5

A0

Normal paper

No.15

A0

Normal paper

No.15

Adjustment: See Section 9.4.1. Fixation position

1189 mm

Adjustment: See Section 9.4.2. Cutter mount height

1189 mm

Adjustment: See Section 9.4.3. Normal paper / tracing paper (75 g) / film Normal paper / tracing – 297 mm A0 No.15 paper (75 g) / film Normal paper / tracing Cut length accuracy* – 210 mm A0 paper (75 g) / film Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: line). The cut length is reduced if numeric value is increased (1 line = 0.042333 mm). When the set value is increased, the cut length will be decreased. (1 line = 0.042333 mm) Adjustment: See Section 9.4.4. Print length accuracy*

Top edge registration*

–

1189 mm

A0

–

1189 mm

A0

– Center registration*

Normal paper

No.15

Remarks: The print length is reduced if numeric value is increased. (About ±3.3 mm per 841 mm is reduced if there is a ±5 Hz change) Adjustment: See Section 9.4.5. Normal paper / tracing – 1189 mm A0 paper (75 g) / film Normal paper / tracing – 297 mm A0 No.15 paper (75 g) / film Normal paper / tracing – 210 mm A0 paper (75 g) / film Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: msec). The print start position reverses if numeric value is increased (10 msec = 0.8 mm). Adjustment: See Section 9.4.6. 1189 mm

A0

Normal paper

No.15

Remarks: The print position is shifted to the left if numeric value is increased (1 byte = 0.508 mm). Adjustment: See Section 9.4.7. Fixation position

1189 mm

A0

Normal paper

No.15

Checking Skew Adjustment: See Section 9.4.2.

*

Items to be adjusted in the engine maintenance mode. Select maintenance code if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance. Select maintenance code if the adjustment is performed after test print and measurement.

9-9

9.4.1

Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure

WARNING -

Immediately after the operation, the fixation and hexagon head screws are hot. So, keep away from these parts. Otherwise, you may be burned. Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.

1 Set the A1 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer). 2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and perform the maintenance code "07," "08" or "09" (see Section 2.3.9). Test prints are output. 3 Measure the black band, which is printed at the position 30 to 40 cm away from the top edge of the test print, at both sides. (See the figure below.)

7.5±0.5 mm

7.5±0.5 mm 30 to 40 cm

Paper feed direction

25 mm

25 mm

Reference value: Width of the black band = 7.5 ± 0.5 mm Difference between left and right = ± 0.5 mm or less 4 When the value is deviated from the standard value, open the top door (door 6) and adjust it by turning the nip adjustment screws being provided on both sides of the fixation unit (first loosen the nut that is fixing the nip adjustment screws).

Fixation adjustment screw

Turning the screw clockwise : Decreases the nip pressure. Turning the screw counterclockwise : Increases the nip pressure.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the adjusting meet the reference values. 6 Retighten the nut loosened in the previous steps to adjust the nip pressure.

9-10

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.4.2

Adjusting the Skew/Slack

WARNING -

Don't touch the fixation and hexagon head screw right after the operation. These components become hot and may result in burns. Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.

1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer). 2 Turn on the engine maintenance mode and check the nip voltage for appropriateness. If it is off the standard value, adjust it. see Section 9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure. 3 Print 3 copies of the engine test pattern No.5 consecutively. (see Section 2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) Engine maintenance code "05") 4 Check the rear end of the roll for smear without registration (several millimeters wide wedge-shaped horizontal lines). 5 If a smear appears, remove the right upper cover, left upper cover, front cover, cover (FDL), cover (FDR) and manual feed drawer from the device body. Insert papers between the open/close sensors for the fixation door and the manual feed drawer to simulate the closed state of the door. Then adjust the fixation unit alignment and the heat roller speed. a) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the right side of a print sample (right side of the device) -> Push the right side of the fixation unit toward backside of the device. Paper feed direction

13cm

b) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the left side of a print sample (left side of the device) -> Pull the right side of the fixation unit toward front side the device. Paper feed direction

13cm

9-11

Use the alignment adjusting screw for the adjustment. Clockwise turn: Pushes back the right side of the fixation unit Counterclockwise turn: Pulls out the right side of the fixation unit

Note Be sure to loosen 2 set screws on the fixation unit before adjusting.

1) Mark the initial positions of the top and bottom screws fixing the fixation unit on the right side plate. 2) Turning the alignment adjusting screw, move the fixation unit until the horizontal lines of the smear are moved to the left side. (Try to move about 1 mm from the original position, though the distance depends on the magnitude of the smear.) 3) Mark the screw position as the horizontal lines of the smear are moved to the left side. 4) Fine-control the alignment between the original position and the position being recorded as the lines are moved to the left side. *

Turning the alignment adjusting screw may not immediately move the fixation unit. Thus, it is advisable to move the unit while observing the move of the screw-fixed portions at the top and bottom of the fixation unit on the right side plate. (Above can be done easier by removing the screw and observing move of the screw hole.) And the screw-fixed portion at the top of the fixation unit may sometimes not follow that of the bottom portion. In such case, retry the operation after loosening the duct set screws on the fixation unit. * When the alignment adjustment alone is not enough for adjusting wrinkles or missed print, adjust the heat roller speed. (Modify the default value by ±10 or ±20) (See Section 2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (3/4))

9-12

Chapter 9 Adjustment

c) If horizontal lines of a smear are conspicuous across the full width a print sample
Increase the heat roller speed. Modify the heat roller speed control parameter by +10 or +20 from the default value.

Paper feed direction

13cm

6 Repeat above adjustment and printing until the smear without registration becomes inconspicuous on No.5 test print. Then check No.14 test print for irregularities of the lines in a space 13 mm or so away from the rear end. * Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with No.5. Thus, if further adjustment is needed in spite of the adjustment made in No.5, adjust the heat roller speed. If the speed adjustment doesn’t solve the problem, readjust referencing the results of No.5 and No.14. 7 Tighten 2 fixation unit set screws. 8 Use A1 size for the adjustment. As the adjustment with A0 size is completed, generate 3 copies of No.5 test print consecutively in the same manner. * Even when the smear was found on A1 size, first adjust with A0 size. If a smear appears at any place or size on the print sample, modify the heat roller speed control parameter by -10 or -20 from the default value. * Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with A0 size. Thus, if further adjustment was needed with A1 size, support it by adjusting the heat roller speed. If the speed adjustment could not eliminate the problem, proceed to readjustment referencing the results of A1 and A0 size.

9-13

9.4.3

Adjusting the Cut Squareness 1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in the roll 1 (upper drawer). 2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and output engine test pattern 15. (maintenance code "15," see Section 2.3.10.) 3 Measure the cut squareness. For measuring method and reference value, see "No. 7" in Section 7.2.1. 4 If the standard value is met, remove the cutter cover and then loosen 2 screws on both side and 1 screw at the center.

Cutter mounting sheet metal

5 While moving up and down the cutter mounting brackets (at a rough estimate), adjust the cutter mounting height. 6 Tighten the screws to fix. 7 After repeating steps 2 through 6, adjust until the measured value satisfies the reference value.

9-14

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.4.4

Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy Select the maintenance code , subcode "04" in the maintenance mode if performing the adjustment after the test print and measurement. ⇒See item (1) below. Select maintenance code , subcode "801 - 848" in the maintenance mode if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance. ⇒See item (2) below.

This paragraph outlines adjustment procedures and explains supplementary operations. For concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code "REGULATE" (Adjustment)," "2.3.12 Maintenance Code "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."

(1) When the cut length is adjusted and measured after the test print: This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data are set to defaults. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Select subcode "11< 04> Cut-Length." 3 Select the roll paper and print length test conditions. Note:

For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use default value as it is.

4 Output the print of subcode "04." Three sheets are outputted continuously. 5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the specification. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.6. OK if within the specification. - Repeat steps 3 and 4, when further making a check under other test conditions. - Go to step 9 when finishing the test. If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6. 6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below. Example 1: When the paper length is short. (The actual sheet length is 1182 mm although the reference value, A0 = 1189±6 mm.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value: 1182 - 1189 = - 7 mm 2. Calculate the number of print lines equivalent to the difference (1 line = 0.0423 mm):- 7 ÷ 0.04213 = -165.8 lines ⇒ -165 lines

9-15

3. Check the value saved in NVRAM. * The default is determined by the print length and roll paper specifications. 4. Calculate the correction value and enter the result: 300 lines - 165 lines = 135 lines 7 Output the test print of subcode "04." Three sheets are output continuously. 8 Measure the length of the third sheet and check whether the paper length meets the requirement. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM.

(2) If the cut length is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance: This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the cut length of plain paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number. - Select the subcode suitable for the print length and roll paper conditions. 3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into the number of lines to determine the correction value. For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above. 4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the cut length, repeat steps 2 and 3 above. 5 Save the correction value in NVRAM. 6 Execute the print with maintenance code and subcode "04," and check the cut length after adjustment. - Check all codes with which the cut length was adjusted. - Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment. For the print executing method, see 2.3.11. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.6.

9-16

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.4.5

Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy Select maintenance code , subcode "03" in the maintenance mode if performing the adjustment after the test print and measurement. ⇒See item (1) below. Select maintenance code , subcode "718 - 724" in the maintenance mode if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance. ⇒See item (2) below. This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code "REGULATE" (Adjustment)," "2.3.12 Maintenance Code "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code "NVRAM" (NVRAM)." Hint:

The type and width of the paper used are A1 width of plain paper. However, if the user's paper use condition is limited, the adjustment may be performed under that condition.

(1) When the plotting length is adjusted and measured after the test print: This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default. Only the roll paper is subject to adjustment of print length. To adjust the A4 cut paper, follow the procedures in item (2). 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Select subcode "11 plotting -Length." 3 Select the roll paper to be used. - The print length accuracy may be adjusted using either roll 1 or 2. Note:

For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use default value as it is.

4 Output the print of subcode "03." Three sheets are outputted continuously. (print length: 1189 mm) 5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the specification. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.1. OK if within the specification. Go to step 9, finishing the test. If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6. 6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below. Example 1: When the plotting length is short. (The actual print length is 1122.8 mm although the reference value is 1127.1 mm ± 0.5 %.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value:1122.8 - 1127.1 = -4.3 mm

9-17

2. Calculate the shift from the reference value in percentage -4.3 ÷ 1127.1 = -0.00382 (about 0.38 % short) 3. Check the value saved in NVRAM. (Default = 1915 lines/sec) 4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to reference value: 1915 × (-0.00382) = -7.31 ⇒ -7 lines/sec 5. Calculate the correction value and enter the result: 1915 - 7 = 1908 lines/sec Example 2: When the plotting length is long. (The actual print length is 1131.8 mm although the reference value is 1127.1 mm - 0.5 %.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value: 1131.8 - 1127.1 = 4.7 mm 2. Calculate the shift from the standard in percentage: 4.7 ÷ 1127.1 = -0.00417 (about 0.42 % long) 3. Check the value saved in NVRAM. (Default = 1915 lines/sec) 4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the to the print length to reference value: 1915 × 0.00417 = 7.99 ⇒ 8 lines/sec 5. Calculate the correction value and enter the result: 1915 + 8 = 1923 lines/sec 7 Output test print of subcode "03." Three sheets are output continuously. 8 Measure the plotting length of the third sheet and check whether it meets the requirement. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable, reexecute the above procedures from Step 6. (2) If the plotting length is adjusted when the value to be adjusted is known in advance This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the plotting length to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number of the item to be adjusted. 3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into lines per second to determine the correction value. For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above. 4 Save the correction value in NVRAM. 5 Execute the print using maintenance code and subcode "03," and check the plotting length after adjustment. For the print executing method, see 2.3.11. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.6.

9-18

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.4.6

Adjusting the Top Edge Registration Select maintenance code , subcode "03" in the maintenance mode if performing the adjustment after the test print and measurement. ⇒See item (1) below. Select maintenance code , subcode "601 - 649" in the maintenance mode if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance. ⇒See item (2) below. This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code "REGULATE" (Adjustment)," "2.3.12 Maintenance Code "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."

(1) When the top edge registration is adjusted and measured after the test print: This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Select subcode "11 Front-Regist." 3 Select roll paper and print length test conditions. Note:

For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default value as it is.

4 Output the print of subcode "01." Three sheets are outputted continuously. 5 Measure the top edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the specifications. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.3. OK if within the specification. - Repeat steps 3 and 4, when further making a check under other test conditions. - Go to step 9 when finishing the test. If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust (Go to step 9.) 6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below. Example 1: When the top edge registration is short. (The actual top edge registration is 18.2 mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and reference value: 18.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm 2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s) -3.5 ÷ 80 = -0.04375 (sec) ⇒ This means the plotting starts 43.75 ms earlier.

9-19

3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference value (1 step = 1.0 msec). 43.75 ÷ 1 = 43.75 ⇒ 44 (steps) 4. Check the value saved in NVRAM. (Default = 400 steps*) * The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications. 5. Calculate the correction value and enter the result: 400 + 44 = 444 (steps) Example 2: When the top edge registration is long. (The actual top edge registration is 25.7 mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value: 25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm 2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s) 4.0 ÷ 80 = -0.05 (sec) ⇒ This means the plotting starts 55 msec later. 3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference value (1 step = 2.0 msec). 50.0 ÷ 1 = 50.0 ⇒ 50 (steps) 4. Check the value saved in NVRAM. (Default = 400 steps*) * The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications. 5. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to the reference value. 400 - 50 = 350 (steps) 7 Output the print of subcode "01." Three sheets are output continuously. 8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted check if it satisfies the specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable, reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.

(2) If the top edge registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance: This adjustment is effective, for instance, when the user requests the top edge registration of plain paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code . 2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number of the item to be adjusted. 3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction value. Enter that correction value. For the calculation method, see Step 6 of Paragraph (1) above. 4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the top edge registration, repeat steps 2 and 3 above.

9-20

Chapter 9 Adjustment

5 Save the correction value in NVRAM. 6 Perform maintenance code , subcode to print, check the top edge registration after adjustment. - Check all the subcodes where the top edge registration was adjusted. - For the adjusted subcodes, match the test conditions and the print conditions. For the print method, see Section 2.2.11. For measuring method and reference value, see No. 3 in Section 7.2.1. 9.4.7

Adjusting the Center Registration Select maintenance code , subcode "03" in the maintenance mode if performing the adjustment after the test print and measurement. ⇒See item (1) below. Select maintenance code , subcode "718 - 724" in the maintenance mode if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance. ⇒See item (2) below. This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains supplementary operations. For concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code "REGULATE" (Adjustment)," "2.3.12 Maintenance Code "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."

(1) When the center registration is adjusted and measured after the test print: This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code . 2 Select the subcode "11 Center-Regist." 3 Select the roll paper to be used. Note:

For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default value as it is.

4 Output the print of subcode "02." Three sheets are outputted continuously. 5 Measure the top edge registration of the sheet outputted third to check if it satisfies the specifications. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.4. OK if within the specification. - Repeat steps 3 and 4, when further making a check under other test conditions. - Go to step 9 when finishing the test. If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.

9-21

6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below. Example 1: When the center registration is short. (The actual center registration is 25.2 mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value. 25.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm 2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.0508 mm). -3.5 ÷ 0.0508 = -6.9 pitches ⇒ This means the 6.9 pitch print position is shifted rightward. 3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference value (1 step = 1 pitches). 6.9 ÷ 1 = 6.9 ⇒ 7 (steps) 4. Check the value saved in NVRAM. (Default = 50 steps) 5. Calculate the correction value and enter the result: 50 + 7 = 57 (steps) Example 2: When the center registration is long. (The actual side registration is 25.7 mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.) 1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the standard: 25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm 2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.508 mm): 4.0 ÷ 0.508 = 7.9 (pitches) ⇒ This means the 7.9 pitch print position is shifted leftward. 3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference value (1 step = 8 pitches): 7.9 ÷ 1 = 7.9 ⇒ 8 (steps) 4. Check the value saved in NVRAM. (Default = 50 steps) 5. Calculate the correction value and enter the result: 50 - 8 = 42 (step) 7 Output the print of subcode "02." Three sheets are outputted continuously. 8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it to NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable, reexecute the above procedures from Step 6. (2) If the center registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance This method is effective when the user requests you to shift the center registration of the roll 1 to the left or right by a given amount. 1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number of the item to be adjusted. 9-22

Chapter 9 Adjustment

3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction value. For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above. 4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the center registration, repeat steps 2 and 3 above. 5 Save the correction value to NVRAM. 6 Execute the print with maintenance code and subcode "03," and check the center registration after adjustment. - Check all codes with which the center registration was adjusted. - Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment. For the print executing method, see 2.3.11. For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.4.

9-23

9.5

Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space

The device supports the following maximum plotting range: The device has a dead space of 3 mm at the top edge of the paper. When the user wants wider plotting range, the dead space can be reduced so that the image will be printed as near to the edge as possible. To this end, perform the maintenance code , subcode "663" of engine maintenance mode of "Top Edge Clip Requirement." Note:

If this adjustment is performed, explain the user that the possibility of paper jam increases and get approval. The dead space at the top edge of paper is provided as the clip amount to separate the paper from the heat roller in the fusing process. Accordingly, if this clip amount is narrowed, the possibility of paper jam increases (particularly when high density data is plotted at the top edge of paper). The preset value for the top edge clip amount adjustment does not become effective unless the device is rebooted, thus requiring care.

1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code . 2 Enter the subcode "663." 3 Convert the desired dead space (mm) into the number of lines. Example:

To set the dead space to 1mm, conduct the following operation. (default: 71 lines = 3.0 mm) : Determine what number of lines is equivalent to 1 mm (1 line = 0.04233 mm) and enter the result. 1 ÷ 0.04233 = 23.62 ⇒ 24 (lines)

4 Save the value in NVRAM. 5 Turn off the device once and turn it on again to reboot the system. 6 Allow the computer to send the data whose top margin is minimum to the device and check whether the plotting is printed correctly.

9-24

Chapter 9 Adjustment

9.6

Adjusting the LED Head Joint

This section describes how to adjust the LED head joint. This process is needed after the LED head is replaced with a new one. (1) Configuration of LED head The LED head is designed as illustrated below. Therefore, it is necessary to correct and adjust the print shift at joints among heads. LED head Head C

Plotter

Head B

Head A

Paper feed direction

(2) Parameters To adjust LED head joints, use the following parameters. (* Pay attention that the preset parameter will not deviate from the allowable range.) 1 Maintenance code , subcord "708" : Fine adjustment of joint between heads A and B (setting range: 0 to 65) 2 Maintenance code , subcord "709" : Fine adjustment of joint between heads C and B (setting range: 0 to 65) After the adjustment in the order of line with maintenance code , subcord "711" and maintenance coded , subcord "713," finely adjust the joint with this parameter. The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1." 3 Maintenance code , subcord "710": Start address used to write the data to each head memory. To find the first print shift, temporarily specify "100." The shipping default is fixed to "94." 4 Maintenance code , subcord "711": Line adjustment parameter used between heads A and B (setting range: 87 to 93)

9-25

5 Maintenance code , subcord "712":

Line adjustment parameter used for head B (fixed to 0) 6 Maintenance code , subcord "713": Lin adjustment parameter used between heads C and B (setting range: 87 to 93) This parameter adjusts the shift in the order of line. The amount of 42.3 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1." To find the first print shift, temporarily set both maintenance code , subcord "711" and maintenance code , subcord "713" to 98. Since maintenance code , subcord "712" is a reference, or head B, the value must be fixed to 0. (3) Basic operation Shown below are operations observed on the device when above parameters settings are changed. (a) Maintenance code , subcord "708" and maintenance code , subcord "709" 1 When decreasing set values: Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.

C

B

Shifted

A

Shifted

* Image B does not move since it is reference. Paper feed direction

2 When increasing set values: Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as reference. Shifted

Shifted

A

C B

* Image B does not move since it is reference.

9-26

Paper feed direction

Chapter 9 Adjustment

(b) Maintenance code , subcord "711" and maintenance code , subcord "713" 1 When decreasing set values: Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as reference. Shifted

Shifted

A

C B

* Image B does not move since it is reference. Paper feed direction

2 When increasing set values: Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.

C

B

Shifted

A

Shifted

* Image B does not move since it is reference. Paper feed direction

9-27

(4) Print pattern Use pattern 7. Print out maintenance code , subcode . (5) Adjustment method (a) Check the adjustment positions. Provide the following parameter settings and printed. Maintenance code , subcode "708": 0 Maintenance code , subcode "709": 0 Maintenance code , subcode "710": 100 Maintenance code , subcode "711": 98 Maintenance code , subcode "712": 0 Maintenance code , subcode "713": 98

With the above settings, the pattern is output with images shifted as shown below. Identify the place of shift from this sample.

C

B

Paper feed direction

9-28

A

Chapter 9 Adjustment

(b) Adjustment Execute the test printing by setting the following parameters respectively. These values are set, considering the distance 3.8 mm between A and B, and B and C of the LED head. Maintenance code subcode "708": 16 Maintenance code subcode "709": 16 Maintenance code subcode "710": 94 Maintenance code subcode "711": 90 Maintenance code subcode "712": 0 Maintenance code subcode "713": 90 In the following settings, adjust according to how the printed image is shifted.

1 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B Increase the setting values of both maintenance code subcode "708" and maintenance code subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1.") If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the set values of both maintenance code subcode "711" and maintenance code subcode "713." If they are initially 90, decrease them to 89.

C

B

A

Paper feed direction

After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code subcode "708" and maintenance code subcode "709."

9-29

2 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B Decrease the setting values of both maintenance code subcode "708" and maintenance code subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1.") If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting values of both maintenance code subcode "711" and maintenance code subcode "713." If they are initially 90, decrease them to 91.

A

C B

Paper feed direction

After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code subcode "708" and maintenance code subcode "709."

9-30

Chapter 9 Adjustment

3 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction, C is shifted in the paper feed direction and reverce direction on the basis of B Increase the setting values of maintenance code subcode "708." Decrease the setting value of maintenance code subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1.") If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the setting value of maintenance code subcode "711" and increase the set value of maintenance code subcode "713."

C B A

Paper feed direction

After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code subcode "708" and maintenance code subcode "709."

9-31

4 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction and reverce direction, C is shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B Decrease the setting values of maintenance code subcode "708." Increase the set value of maintenance code subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1.") If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting value of maintenance code subcode "711" and decrease the set value of maintenance code subcode "713."

A B C

Paper feed direction

After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code subcode "708" and maintenance code subcode "709."

(6) Judgment criteria When lines are united in the scan direction on the test pattern 7, head joints are correctly adjusted. Note that some lines may exceptionally be dislocated (terminated) due to jitter. If other lines are united, the image is acceptable.

(7) Data storage When the image is acceptable, save the data in the NVRAM. See Section "2.3.13 Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."

9-32

Chapter 10 Operational Description

Chapter 10

Operational Description

This chapter gives fundamental information to understand mechanical operations of this device, as well as the information on the controller that performs data communications with the computers. 10.1 through 10.8 describe the information concerning the engine: 10.1 Features 10.2 Engine Specifications 10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part 10.4 Fundamental Operation (Overall Operation) 10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation 10.6 Drive and Feed System Operation 10.7 Control System 10.8 Controller

10-1

10.1

Features

This device is an intelligent plotter that uses a magnetic one-component developing system plus 600 dpi wide LED head as a developer so that it can realize excellent printing quality and quietness suitable for LAN environment. Main features are as follows: 1 Easy operation-first user interface design - All operations (paper feed, drawing output) are performed at the front. - 2-drawer type roll paper feed 2 Lightweight, compact-size, and high cost-performance engine 3 Stabilized printing by use of a one-component developing system

10-2

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.2

Engine Specifications

1 Type: Floor type 2 Recording method

3 4 5 6

7

8 9 0 A B C

: Dry electrophotographic method Photosensitive : OPC drum (φ 60) Charging : Scorotron (negative charge applied, grid control) Exposure : LED (36 inches, 600 dpi) Development : One-component development Transfer : Corona transfer Separation : AC corona Cleaning : Blade cleaning Fusing : Heat roll fusing (halogen lamp) Toner : 9µ magnetic one component (cartridge 500 g) Recording density : 600 × 600 dpi Process speed : 800 mm/sec Process cartridge capability: about 5 km Paper: Media : Normal paper (high quality paper)/Recycled paper/ Tracing paper/Mat film Paper feed : 2-roll auto paper feed with cutter/A0, front paper feed Paper ejection : Faceup, front ejection, tray/bucket (OP) Effective recording width : 926.48 mm (A0), guaranteed area inside 5 mm from top and trail edges and 3 mm from both side edges Long size printing : 2.5 m (in use of A0 paper roll), or 10 m for L type Print quality : Density : 1.0 or more Density uniformity : 0.3 or less Jam rate : 1/3000 or less (normal paper) MTBF : 2000 h (not including consumable parts) Weight : 190 kg or less (main unit + photosensitive drum) Power consumption : 1350 W Warming up time : within 4 minutes (at 23°C) Operating environment : Temperature ; 15 - 35°C Humidity : 20 - 80%RH Noise : During operation : 61 dB or less During standby : 53 dB or less Device life : S model is 80 km and L model is 200 km

10-3

10.3

Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

A sectional view of the internal mechanism of the device is shown in Figure 10-1 to show the paper flow and name of each part. Process cartridge D A B

5 6

C

6 LED head B Charge eliminator is not included.

E

7

F

8

G

4 1 Roll 1 2 Roll 2

0 H 9

1

3 Slitter cutter I 4 Register roller 3 5 Primary charger 6 LED head 7 Developer 8 Developing sleeve 9 Transfer/separator 0 Finger

2

A Cleaner B Charge eliminator C Photosensitive drum D Suction feeder E Fixation F Heat roller G Backup roller H Roller (manual feed 1) I Roller (manual feed 2)

Figure 10-1 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

10-4

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.4

Basic Operation (Overall Operation)

10.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration This device consists of the four main blocks: paper feed and feed system; electrophoto process; controller, and interface systems.

Electrophoto process system

Controller

Charge elimination

Primary charge

Exposure (LED)

Cleaner

Drum

Development

Control panel Engine control circuit (board)

Data controller

Raster controller circuit

Transfer separation

Fixation

Feed system

Paper ejector External equipment

Registration

Paper cutter Roll paper

Interface circuit Paper feed and feed system

Roll paper feed mechanism

Figure 10-2 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration

10-5

10.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration

OPERATION PANEL

BL03 R/C/L

BL02,BL06

INT1

MS08

MS06-1

GM01

LEDH TH03

BM01 TH01 TH02 TH04

MS04

CC TS02

EL DEVELOPER

FUSER CLEANER

MS05

DBD DBA

DRUM

TS01

FL01 FL02

MS06-2

HM01 PS06

DC

CL04 TM01 REGIST ROLLER

TC

PS07

PS05 INT3 BL06

BL01

PM01 PMFG

MS07 PS15

CL06

AC IN

BL05-1 to 3

CUTM MRC2

HDD

MEC

LVPS

HV-PS

CUTTER RE01/02

PF ROLLER 1

PS21

PS11

ROLL-1

PS30 PS31 PS32 PS04

FM01

PF ROLLER 2

PS22

PS12

ROLL-2

FM02

Figure 10-3 Overview of Device Configuration Drawing

10-6

Chapter 10 Operational Description

Table 10-1 Symbol Table Name Develpment Transfer Separation Charge Charge elimination Process motor Developer pulse motor Paper feed pulse motor Heat roller pulse motor Paper feed pulse motor 1 Paper feed pulse motor 2 Cutter motor Registration roller clutch Manual feed roller clutch Suction fan Fixation upper center blower Charger blower Fixation upper (both side fan) Fixation halogen lamp 1 Fixation halogen lamp 2

SYMBOL DP TC DC CC EL PM01 GM01 TM01 HM01 FM01 FM02 CUTM CL04 CL06 BL01 BL02 BL03 R/C/L BL06 FL01 FL02

Paper detection sensor (for judgment of A0 width) Paper detection sensor (for judgment of A1 width) Paper detection sensor (for judgment of A2 width) Paper detection sensor (lower cutter) Paper detection sensor (register) Paper detection sensor (suction) Paper detection sensor (fuser) Roll 1 (upper tray) flange detection sensor Roll 2 (middle tray) flange detection sensor Manual feed paper detection sensor Roll 1 drawer open/close sensor Roll 2 drawer open/close sensor

PS30 PS31 PS32 PS04 PS05 PS06 PS07 PS11 PS12 PS15 PS21 PS22

Toner door open/close switch Waste toner bottle detection switch Fixation device door open/close switch Upper left door open/close switch Upper door open/close interlock switch Cutter door open/close interlock switch Cutter blade (right end) detection micro switch Cutter blade (left end) detection micro switch

MS04 MS05 MS06-1, MS06-2 MS08 INT1 INT3 RE01 RE02

Toner sensor Waste toner sensor

TS01 TS02

Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (center) Fixation overheat detection thermistor LED head temperature measurement thermistor Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (edge)

TH01 TH02 TH03 TH04

10-7

10.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram The mechanical controller receives signals sent from external devices, and drives the LED head and controls actuators to print operation. The controller also creates test patterns by means of the internal board to print those sheets without signal input from external devices.

PCB-ASSY-MRC2

USB Parallel interface Ethernet interface

RIP controller Switches and sensors Blowers

Sensors

Clutch

Charge eliminator

Pulse motors (TM01, FM01, FM02)

Charger cleaning motor

Cutter motor

PCB-ASSY-MEC

Motor driver

Engine controller

Pulse motors (GM01) Primary charger LED head Developer

Transfer Separator

High voltage power unit

+5V

+24V

+24V Heater control

+5V

DC servo motor (PM01)

+24V

Control panel

HDD +12V +24V

Low voltage power unit

AC100V

+5V

AC100V Main power switch

Fusing heater

Figure 10-4 Configuration Block Diagram

10-8

Sub power unit

+5V

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.4.4 Outline of Operations (1) Warm-up operation 1 Section - From heater ON until the fusing roller temperature reaches the specified temperature. 2 Purpose - Warms the fusing roller up to the specified temperature. 3 Operation - The process motor rotates to uniform the temperature of fusing roller. - Paper detection operation (whether paper is present or not/size/head positioning) is performed. (2) Standby status 1 Section - After the end of warm up until the print data reception finished. - After the end of paper ejection until the next print data are received. 2 Purpose - Controls the fusing roller to the specified temperature to retain the device in standby status. 3 Operation - For the temperature control, the fuser temperature control thermistor is sampled to control the heater activation. Also, the process motor rotates to uniform the surface temperature of fusing roller. (3) Pre-rotation 1 Section - After the end of print data reception until the LED head writing (exposure) starts. 2 Purpose - As the preparation for printing, eliminates residual charges on the photosensitive drum and stabilizes the sensitivity of photosensitive drum. 3 Operation - The drum starts to rotate by the drum motor and at the same time, the primary charger, transfer corotron, and charge elimination are turned on, and in this state the drum rotates by one or two turns. Also, after one turn, the developing bias turns on. In addition, the main motor rotates to feed the paper up to the point before register roller. (4) Printing 1 Section - From start of LED head writing until the transfer finished. 2 Purpose - Based on the print data transmitted from a computer, forms an image on the photosensitive drum and transfers the toner image on the printing paper. 3 Operation - After LED head writing, the separating corotron and the pre-transfer exposure turn on in this order.

10-9

(5) Post-rotation 1 Section - After transfer OFF until the main motor stops. 2 Purpose - Removes residual toner and potential on the drum, and ejects the paper. 3 Operation - After an image was transferred on the paper, the drum rotates by about one turn to stabilize the drum surface.

10-10

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.5

Electrophotographic Process Operation

10.5.1 Primary Charging As the first step for forming an electrostatic image, the primary charging process is provided to charge the photosensitive drum surface uniformly. This device uses the proven corona charging system (scorotron system excellent in negative charging performance). (1) Function of primary charger 1 Photosensitive drum surface potential applying function (corona discharge function + discharge stabilizing function) : Arranges the charges discharged from the charging wire by the grid electrode and applies them to the photosensitive drum surface.

(2) General description of scorotron charging system 1 Principle Corona discharge (negative corona) : As the electrodes, a pointed conductor such as a needle and wire is used, and as the opposed electrode, a flat plate is used, and then if the voltage applied between them is gradually increased, a pointed part slightly sparks and the current of several micron ampere flows. This phenomenon is called the corona discharge. Negative corona : If negative voltage is applied to the corona electrode wire (negative pole) and the voltage is increased, the electric filed on negative pole surface increases, and electrons are emitted by the field emission, which are the initial electrons. These electrons are accelerated in high electric field and form the primary electron avalanche. Further, positive ions in the avalanche flow into the negative pole and the secondary electrons are emitted, thus generating the secondary avalanche. The avalanche continues in the same manner. The electrons at the leading edge of these avalanches attach to the gas in the air and become negative ions, and then they attach to the drum surface to charge. Principle of scorotron charger : The scorotron charger provides amplification effect by the principle of triode. This utilizes the fact that the electrons move in the electric field, and it amplifies the entire charged electric field. A salient electric field generated from the charged electric field flows into this grid, but a large salient electric field does not propagate down to the drum from the grid. Normally, the power supply is not connected to the grid electrode but the varistor (Zener diode) is connected. The varistor is a semiconductor of which resistance value varies according to the voltage, and it discharges when the voltage is high and does not discharge when low. 2 Configuration : A wire electrode as a conductor, and a shield electrode that covers the wire electrode are arranged, and also a grid electrode is installed at the opening.

10-11

10.5.2 Photosensitive Drum As an electrophotographic photosensitive material, this device uses the OPC (organic photosensitive) material. (1) Function of photosensitive drum 1 Charge retaining function 2 Electrostatic image holding function 3 Toner transfer function (2) General description of OPC photosensitive drum 1 Principle Carrier generation (optical exciter) : In an organic molecular crystal, exciters are generated by the light exposure. These exciters diffuse up to the crystal surface and lattice defects, and they interact with electrostatic potential that exists there and push out electrons and positive holes. As for the exciters, the exciting state from specific molecules in organic molecular crystal run over the entire crystal as exciting waves to excite the entire crystal with the same phase. At this time, the quantized exciting waves are called the exciters. Ion pairs separated into electrons and positive holes are evaded from one-molecular recombination and thermally dissociated, generating carriers of electrons and positive holes. At this time, if no charges exist on the photosensitive surface, the Coulomb’s force that separates the carriers does not work, allowing them to recombine each other. Carrier transport : In the non-crystal carrier transport layer, carriers move by hopping between molecules of the carrier transport material. The carriers are trapped if adjacent molecules have structural defects that take specific orientation at close range. 2 Configuration : Almost OPC photosensitive drums practically used at present are the layered type consisting of the separated carrier generation and carrier transport which are fundamental processes of photosensitivity. 3 Surface potential of photosensitive drum - Charge : -420 to -390 V → -400 to -370 V (dark decay) - Exposure : -20 to -60 V - Development : -230 to -300 V (developing toner) - Transfer : -40 to -80 V - AC separation : 0 ± AC → 0 V ± Unstable positive and negative surface potential and unstable charged toner remain.

10-12

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.5.3 Exposure This device uses LED head for digital exposure process. (1) Functions of LED head 1 Exposure function : Irradiates light to the photosensitive drum to form a latent image. 2 Optical path length automatic correcting function : Corrects the focal depth automatically (butt roller, etc.) if sufficient focal depth cannot be ensured. 3 Head/machine internal temperature measuring function : Thermistors are installed inside the head unit to measure the machine internal temperature and the head temperature. 4 Line width adjusting function : The line width can be changed by adjusting the light emitting time of LED. (2) General description of LED head LED array 1 Principle (light emitting principle) : The Hall current applied to the LED array is blocked by the hetero barrier in the "pn" junction (hetero junction), and the injection current flows toward there (recombination of carriers), causing the light (hv) to be emitted. SELFOC lens 1 Principle and manufacturing method : The glass element wire is formed by the materials having the composition containing graded index forming components such as Cs, Li, and Tl, and it is soaked in the fused salt that contains calcium nitrate or kalium nitrate to form the refractive index by exchanging the ions in glass that takes part in refractive index and the ions in the fused salt. 2 Configuration : Many bar-shaped lenses called the SELFOC (optical converging glass fiber) lens are arranged (SLA is the trademark of Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.). 3 Features : Individual lenses have excellent resolving power and focus a uniform normal standing real image in real size. However, in total their performance disperses and thus the performance should be checked strictly. As the 1:1 image is formed, the focus must be adjusted finely. LED head unit 1 Principle : This optical unit converges the light emitted from the LED array onto the photosensitive surface by means of the SLA. 2 Configuration : LED chip, IC, and board are subjected to the die bonding and wire bonding, and adjusted and inspected, and then assembled with a heat sink, lens, etc.

10-13

10.5.4 Development The development is a process in which the toner is put on an electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum surface to make the image visible. When the toner charged in advance touches the photosensitive drum, whether the toner attaches to the drum depends on the charging status of the photosensitive surface. To assist the toner attachment and to prevent the toner from attaching to the portions other than the image, this device adds DC and AC biases. (1) Functions of developer 1 Toner transfer (development)/bias adding function : Transfers the toner to an electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum to make the image visible. A thin film is formed for easy toner transfer. 2 Toner collecting function : Adds AC bias to collect the toner not used for the development. 3 Toner supply function : Supplies the toner from the toner cartridge. Supplies the toner to the sleeve by means of the agitator. 4 Low toner detecting function : Detects the toner empty state by the toner sensor (piezoelectric sensor). 5 Density adjusting function : Adjusts the development density by varying the developing bias. 6 Toner agitating function : Agitates the toner by rotating the agitator to prevent the soft block. 7 Development gap retaining function : Retains the development gap by pushing the butt roller against the photosensitive drum. (2) General description of magnetic one-component developing system 1 Principle : The toner made of magnetic powders of 0.1 to 0.5 µm in size that disperse in the resin binder added with carbon black is transported by the developing sleeve around the magnetic roll. In general, the toner layer of 40 to 50 µm in thickness is formed on the sleeve surface, and when it is transported up to the photosensitive surface, the charge (AC+DC) is applied to the toner, and when electrostatic attraction between the latent image and the toner becomes larger than the magnetic binding force, the toner attaches to the latent image to develop. 2 Configuration : The sleeve made of non-magnetic materials such as stainless steel and aluminum material rotates in the forward direction relative to the photosensitive drum. Its rotating speed is one to three times the surface speed of the photosensitive drum. The magnetic roll is fixed in the sleeve so that it does not rotate, and six magnetic poles are arranged where the main pole having the strongest magnetic force is arranged in opposition to the photosensitive drum. This main pole is located at the rotational upstream side (1 - 5°) from a line connecting the center of sleeve and the center of photosensitive drum. A rubber blade is forcibly pushed against the sleeve in the counter direction of the sleeve rotation, and the toner is charged while its layer is thinned by being scraped by this rubber blade. Also, AC+DC bias voltages are supplied to the sleeve to assist the toner movement during the development. 10-14

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.5.5 Transfer The transfer process (so-called electrostatic transfer) moves the toner attaching to the electrostatic image which is developed on photosensitive drum by the Coulomb force to the final support such as paper, acting against the Coulomb's force. In the electrostatic transfer system, the charged toner of 5 to 15 µm in particle diameter forms one to three layers that attach to the electrostatic image on the photosensitive surface, and then charges are given from the back of transfer paper to move the toner to the transfer paper by the Coulomb's force in the electric field generated in relation to the photosensitive drum and to retain the toner on the paper. This device uses the previously proven corona transfer system. (1) Functions of transfer unit 1 Paper charging function : Performs the corona discharge from the back of paper to charge the paper so that the toner is transferred to the paper. 2 Paper jam preventive function : Prevents the leading edge of paper from entering the transfer unit along the paper guide, resulting in paper jam. (2) General description of corona transfer 1 Principle : For the principle of discharge, see the primary charger. In the state where the photosensitive drum is charged negatively and the toner in negative pole is developed, to transfer this toner to the transfer paper, positive charges are supplied from the back of transfer paper by the corona discharge. The positive charges that reached the back of paper transfer the toner having negative polarity to the paper and further induce negative charges in the photosensitive and the photosensitive layer. At this time, the potential of the paper becomes several hundreds to 1,000V relative to the photosensitive substrate, causing the paper to be closely stuck to the photosensitive drum. The intensity of electric field at this time reaches 100,000 V. (Though the air withstands 30,000 V, when a gap is small, discharge does not occur because of the Paschen's law.) As the gap increases when the paper is separated, the potential of the paper increases and the dielectric breakdown occurs following the Paschen's law, causing the discharge. As a result, positive and negative charges remain at random on the photosensitive surface. At this time, the toner sticking force to the paper is given by an electrostatic force and the Van der Waals' force. 2 Configuration : Though the configuration is similar to the primary charger, in many cases the transfer unit is integrated with the AC separator. Also, the paper guide is provided to prevent the separated paper from entering the unit. The transfer unit itself does not touch directly the toner and the transfer paper, and thus no cleaning is required.

10-15

10.5.6 Separation To separate the paper after transfer, a system that uses both general AC discharge separation and finger separation is employed. (1) Function of separator 1 Paper discharging function : Eliminate charges from the paper and photosensitive drum. (2) General description of AC discharge separation system To separate the paper appropriately, the AC discharge separation system discharges the paper after transfer using an AC charger and a discharge needle. If the OPC photosensitive drum is used, the recording paper is positively charged by the transfer charger and attracted to the photosensitive drum surface by electrostatic force. Accordingly, the separating charger discharges AC corona to remove electrostatic attractive force between the recording paper and the drum so as to separate the recording paper. In general, thin paper having small stiffness may result in a separation failure, and therefore the AC discharge voltage value and a range of permissible value must be determined from the image quality and separation performance. The separation guide prevents the print paper from entering the charger. Also, the separation guide surface is coated with conductive paint so that the potential on the paper feed surface and the recording paper becomes the same in order to prevent the toner from splashing.

10.5.7 Cleaning If the toner is not transferred completely and remains or paper powder is present on the photosensitive drum, it will obstruct the next process or enter the developer, causing a problem. The cleaning process removes these residuals on the photosensitive surface. This device uses a blade cleaning system that scrapes off the residuals mechanically. (1) Functions of cleaning 1 Photosensitive drum surface residual toner removing function : Using the blade, removes the toner and paper powder remaining on the photosensitive drum. 2 Photosensitive drum surface polishing function : Pushes the blade against the drum to polish the photosensitive drum surface, so that the deterioration of drum surface such as a filming can be prevented. 3 Waste toner transport function : Transports waste toner by the auger screw. 4 Splash preventive function : Prevents the toner from splashing by the toner receiver (film). (2) General description of blade cleaning (blade cleaning method) The abrasion resistant blade such as polyurethane scrapes off the residual toner on the drum surface.

10-16

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.5.8 Charge Elimination Residual potential on the photosensitive drum after transfer shows uneven value by the action receiving from each process. Under this condition, if the next process is performed, an afterimage of the previous print may appear, and therefore residual potential on the photosensitive drum must be uniform by the charge elimination before the primary charging. This device uses the LED discharging system by means of the light. (1) Function of charge elimination 1 Residual potential removing function : Removes residual potential on the photosensitive drum surface by irradiating the light with the LEDs.

(2) General description of LED charge elimination In general, red LEDs are used. To adjust the LED light emitting quantity to the drum sensitivity, the number of LEDs and LED driving voltage must be controlled by PWM. Emitting the discharging light at the drum while performing the charging (primary charging), check whether the drum charged voltage is stable to determine the LED light quantity.

10.5.9 Fusing The fusing fixes the toner on the paper. This device uses already proven thermal fusing (heat roll) from the viewpoint of image quality and fixation.

(1) Functions of fuser 1 Heating function : Heats the aluminum heat roller by using a halogen lamp. 2 Temperature detection and control function : Temperature detection range 160°C - 190°C (Type: Temperature detection by thermistor, heater ON/OFF) Overheat detection 200°C (Type: Thermistor) Overheat prevention Overheat prevention by thermal fuse 3 Power saving function 4 Paper feed function 5 Paper compression/nip release function : Releases the nip of fusing rollers by interlocking with the fuser unit opening/closing. 6 Cooling air flow : Exhausts the air on the sides of the device using the blowers. 7 Offset prevention : Prevents the toner offset by using a Teflon roller. 8 High temperature protective function

10-17

(2) General description of heat roll fusing system 1 Principle : The toner fixation is attained through five processes of 1) toner particles are semi-fused by the heat, 2) combined, 3) deformed (spread) to wet the paper, 4) the fused toner penetrates (anchors) between the paper fibers, and 5) solidifies by being cooled to adhere to the paper. The main component of toner, polymer resin, changes its state from glass to rubber and then viscous fluid through glass transition state according to the temperature change. 2 Configuration : The upper heat roll heats the aluminum metallic core from the inside using a halogen lamp heater. Also, the metallic core surface is coated with the resin such as Teflon to improve the parting performance in relation to the toner. The lower backup (pressure) roll made from a metallic core coated with thermosetting silicone rubber excellent in oil resistance, weather resistance, and compression restorable performance is pushed against the upper heat roll to ensure the nip width.

10-18

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.6

Operation of Drive and Feed Systems

10.6.1 Drive System The drive system of this device consists of a paper feed drive motor, cutter upper roller drive motor, process drive motor, and fuser drive motor. The developer and cutter drive motors are also installed and these motors can be operated individually. (1) Process drive motor This motor drives the register roller, drum, cleaner auger, and manual feed roller. The register roller and the manual feed roller are equipped with the drive force transmission clutch, so that the paper feed drive can be turned on or off according to the operational requirements. (2) Cutter upper roller drive motor This motor drives the cutter upper roller. (3) Paper feed motor This motor feeds or rewinds the rolled paper. (4) Developer drive The developer is driven by the developer motor (GM01) installed on the developer. As a drive motor, the stepping motor is used to drive the agitator and the sleeve through the gear transmission. (5) Fixation drive motor The fuser is driven by the fuser motor installed on the fuser. As a drive motor, the stepping motor is used to drive the heat roller and the backup roller through the gear transmission.

10.6.2 Paper feed system (1) Paper feed unit 1 Structure of paper feed unit : The paper feed unit is composed of the two drawers arranged vertically where paper rolls can be fed respectively.

10-19

2 Paper feed/print operation First print : The first sheet (immediately after powering on, or first sheet of intermittent print) needs the pre-rotation of the photosensitive drum, and therefore the print does not start for about 7.4 seconds (pre-rotation time) after the print request is made from the controller until the exposure starts. Intermittent print (paper switching print) : The paper switching operation is inserted if the paper size is different between the first data and the next data. Continuous print (copy) : In a continuous print (copy), the leading edge of the next paper is gripped by the register roller before the paper of the first data printing is ejected to shorten the printing interval. Continuous print (if there is a spool and the controller processing is in time) : Despite different data, if the paper size is the same and the controller processing is in time, the print is possible at the similar print interval to that of copy print. (2) Cutter The paper is cut by a slitter type cutter. At the time of cutting, the buffer is given to the paper in advance to prevent the image quality from being reduced due to a change of paper movement. The paper cutting time is about one second and the paper buffer is given for about one second (80 mm). (3) Suction unit The suction unit feeds the paper by means of belts while sucking the paper by fans in order not to disturb unfixed toner image transferred to the paper. This device uses a system that transports the paper while sucking the entire surface of the paper by sirocco fans. The exhaust air is led to the sides of the device. The drive force of suction belts is supplied from the process motor via the gears. (4) Paper unfeed unit The paper unfeed unit is part of the fuse unit and it is driven by the same drive system as that of the fuse roller. The paper unfeed roller rotates at high speed relative to the fuse roller so that it applies tension to the paper fed from the fuser. This tension is required to prevent a wrinkle of the paper. At the paper ejection outlet, a bucket or stacker can be installed as an option. (5) Register roller The register roller made of a metallic shaft having a concave-convex surface provides the largest paper transport force among all paper feed rollers to ensure the paper feed accuracy.

10-20

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.7

Control System

10.7.1 Process Control (1) Drum surface potential control As the scorotron charge system is used as a charge system, fundamentally the drum surface potential is not controlled. (2) LED head write control The LED head write timing is controlled on the basis of pulse signals from the engine control board. By adjusting finely this base pulse signals, the print timing is varied and the print accuracy can be adjusted. (3) Development density control The development density is determined from correlation of a difference between the dark potential and the light potential of the photosensitive drum and a development bias (DC). Here, it is hard to control a difference between the dark potential and the light potential, but the development density control of this device controls the line width change by controlling the LED head light emitting time (STB width) and controls the development bias. (4) Fuse roller temperature control The fuse roller temperature is controlled within the set temperature range by controlling the on/ off of the fuser lamp based on the temperature value detected by the thermistor. The fuser lamp turns on when the temperature dropped below the preset value on the low temperature side, or it turns off when the temperature reached the preset value on the high temperature side.

10.7.2 Paper Feed Control As for the paper feed control, the feed amount of the main motor is controlled by controlling the paper cut timing. To control the paper feed speed, the motor rotation speed is controlled as mentioned in the motor section.

10-21

10.8

Controller

10.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications 1 Data format : HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP RTL, TIFF, CALS 2 Setup function : SETUP, DEVICE, PAPER, FUNCTION, PROTOCOL, RESET, SYSTEM 3 Memory configuration (see the table below) System configuration

Memory configuration

System operation

Spool

Page memory

Standard

256MB

84MB

12M

160M Equivalent to 2.5 m

Equipped with HDD

256MB

96MB

2G

160M Equivalent to 2.5 m*

* L model allows long printing up to 10 m.

4 Input interface : Ethernet interface (ftp/xpt/lpr) - 100Base-TX and 10Base-TX are supported. (Half/full duplex) : USB interface (port B) - USB2.0 is supported (HI SPEED / FULL SPEED) : Parallel interface (conforming to IEEE1284 (compatibility mode)) - IEEE1284 (conforming to compatibility mode) - Maximum cable length: 10 m

10-22

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.8.2 Hardware Configuration Figure 10-5 shows the overall hardware block diagram.

PCB-MRC2

+5V

+3.3V, +2.5V Power Supply

BOOT ROM (1 MB)

+3.0V, +1.2V CPU_VCORE

RTC, PIO

CPU MPC8245 400MHz

Flash memory (16 MB) SO_DIMM (256MB)

PCI BUS

Debug Slot

Option Slot CF card controller

PCB-USB2

Engine interface & Scanner interface & Panel controller

LAN controller

PCI-PCI bridge

CF card Centronics controller

USB controller

Centro interface

USB I/F

Scanner interface Engine interface 10/100Base-Tx

HDD controller

3.5-inch HDD

Figure 10-5 Controller Block Diagram

10-23

10.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart The flowchart in Figure 10-6 shows how the data sent from the computer is processed in the device.

Computer

Communication driver

Communication driver: - Sends the received data to the spool driver. - Processes the protocol control command sent from the computer.

Spool driver

Spool driver: - Opens the memory when receiving the data from the communication driver.

Spool memory

Spool memory: - Stores the received data.

PDL:

PDL

- A process controlled under the OS. After the main data judgment block judges the received data, the PDL connected to the resulted data format works. - Reads the received data from the spool memory, analyzes the read data, and pastes the raster data to the page memory. - Requests printout to the engine driver. - Plots drawings only in response to the data print command. Page (raster) memory:

Page (raster) memory

- Saves the date processed with the PDL.

Engine driver: Engine driver

- Receives the print request from the PDL and commands the engine to start printing.

Engine

Figure 10-6 Data Processing Flowchart

10-24

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication

SW3

ON

ON 1

8

1 2

SW4

1

8

LED SW2 (both bits must be ON)

Appendix A describes how to set the DIP switches and how to see the LED indication on the MEC board.

A.1

Setting the DIP Switches

A.1.1

Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4) The setting of the DIP switch (DIP SW) on the MEC board is listed below. If the DIP switch setting is changed, reboot the power. DIPSW-5 is normally set to OFF, and set to ON only when the console is used.

Bit

Meaning of ON position

Meaning of OFF position

Normal position

DIPSW-1

–

–

OFF

DIPSW-2

–

–

OFF

DIPSW-3

–

–

OFF

DIPSW-4

–

–

OFF

DIPSW-5

Console is used

Console is not used

OFF

DIPSW-6

–

–

OFF

DIPSW-7

–

–

OFF

DIPSW-8

Long size (10 m) LP-1010L

Standard (2.5 m) LP-1010

–

(All bits must be set to normal position when the machine is delivered) A-1

A.1.2

Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board

2

O F F

1

For setting DIP switch SW2, both bits must be set to ON position.

A.1.3

Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board

Bit2

Bit3

Bit4

Rev. A

ON

ON

ON

ON

Rev. B

OFF

ON

ON

ON

Rev. C

ON

OFF

ON

ON

Rev. D

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

4

3

2

Bit1

O F F

1

For setting DIP switch SW3, the revisions of the MEC board have already been set.

A-2

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication

A.2

LED Indication

The following shows how to see the LED indication on the MEC board. The LED ON/Flashing/OFF are expressed as follows:
: ON ✫ : Flashing ● : OFF ✕ : Indeterminate _ : Don't care

A.2.1

LED indication on MEC board

(1) LED indication immediately after powering on The LED immediately after powering on indicates that the power on check is in progress or that an error was detected during check. At the start of check, the corresponding LED turns on, and at successful termination of check, the corresponding LED of the next check item turns on. If an error is detected, the corresponding LED of the check item continues flashing.

Step

Check item

Corresponding LED

LED indication in normal state

LED indication at error detection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1

Engine firmware operation start

LED8

●●●●●●●


–

2

Program checksum in flash memory (or IC card)

LED7

●●●●●●
●

●●●●●●✫●

3

CPU built-in RAM read/write check

LED6 and LED7

●●●●●

●

●●●●●✫✫●

4

Board matching check

LED5 and LED8

●●●●
●●


●●●●✫●●✫

5

SRAM read/write check

LED6

●●●●●
●●

●●●●●✫●●

6

NVRAM presence check

LED5

●●●●
●●●

●●●●✫●●●

7

Program copy to SRAM

LED5 and LED7

●●●●
●
●

●●●●✫●✫●

(Go to (2), (3), or (4))

A-3

(2) LED indication in usual operation Upon successful termination of the check at powering on, the indication of respective LED is as follows: LED1 and LED2 LED3 LED4 - LED7 LED8

LED

: Ongoing task ID : (Indeterminate because of use for firmware debugging) : Engine status : Presence of print request

LED indication

Description of function

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LED1 and LED2

✫ ✫ ✕ _________

LED3

____✕ _________

Indicate the low-order two bits of ongoing task ID. LEDs are flashing when the task is switched normally. (Reserved) Used for debugging. Applications not specified. Indicate the engine status.

LED4 and LED7

(LED4/5/6/7 all OFF) ____✕ ● ● ● ●__

Power saving

____✕ ● ● ●
__

Warming up

____✕ ● ●
●__

Standby status

____✕ ● ●

__

Printing

____✕ ●
● ●__

(LED5 ON, LED4/6/7 OFF) Recoverable error occurring

____✕

● ●__

(LED4/5 ON, LED6/7 OFF) Unrecoverable error occurring

(LED7 ON, LED4/5/6 OFF)

(LED6 ON, LED4/5/7 OFF)

(LED6/7 ON, LED4/5 OFF)

____✕
● ● ●__

LED8

A-4

(LED4 ON, LED5/6/7 OFF) Initialized state (clock input mode) NVRAM is not initialized.

Indicates whether the print request is present or not.

____✕_________


Turns on when the print request is accepted, and turns off when the requested print finished.

____✕_________●

Turns off when no print request is present.

Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication

(3) LED indication in case of other errors Flashing of LED4 to LED8 indicates the following errors. LED indication

Description of error

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 _____✫ ✫ ✫ ✫ ●

Unexpected interruption occurred.

_____✫ ✫ ✫ ● ✫

NMI interruption occurred.

_____✫ ✫ ● ✫ ✫

Interruption nest under error

_____✫ ● ✫ ✫ ✫

Interruption nest over error

(4) LED indication when power is turned off When the main power switch is turned off, the circuit interrupts the firmware. After that, for more than 10 msec, the 5 V power supply is retained for CPU operation and the firmware can operate. The firmware accepts this interruption, saves the system parameters such as total print distance in the NVRAM within 10 msec, and also turns on the LED4/5/6/7/8. Afterwards, the 5 V power supply shuts down and all LEDs turn off. LED indication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ______






Description of firmware processing Interruption occurs when the power is turned off. The saving of information such as total print distance in NVRAM finished.

If LED4 through LED8 do not turn on when the main power switch is turned off, the interruption from the circuit failed, or saving of system parameters in NVRAM has not finished yet. In this case, "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error will occur when the power is turned on next time.

A-5

A.3

Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board

Pressing the reset switch SW1 causes the circuits of MEC board to be reset, and also the firmware to be reset (restart). However, unlike powering off and on operation, the system parameters such as total print distance are not saved and therefore do not use this switch usually. Using the switch causes "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error. Instead, turn off and then on the power switch.

A-6

Appendix B Setup RFU Board

Appendix B RFU Board Setup

SW1 1 4

A DIP switch is mounted on the RFU board. This appendix describes how to set up this switch.

Setup of DIP Switch

DIP Switch on the RFU Board

4

3

2

Set DIP switch SW1 according to the roll paper configuration of the roll paper feed unit.

1

B.1.1

O F F

B.1

Bit

Meaning of ON (up) position

Meaning of OFF (down) position

1

Roll 1 is loaded.

Roll 1 is not loaded.

2

Roll 2 is loaded.

Roll 2 is not loaded.

3

Roll 3 is loaded.

Roll 3 is not loaded.

4

Paper feed mechanism specifically used for roll flanges (S)

Paper feed mechanism specifically used for roll flanges (L).

B-1

Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board

Appendix C MRC2 Board Setup

SW7

SW1 SW3

SW2

The following describes the setting of DIP switches on the MRC2 board.

C.1

Setup of DIP Switches

C.1.1

DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7)

4

3

2

O F F

1

For setting DIP switch SW7, the revisions of the MRC2 board have been set. Bit1 OFF

Bit2 OFF

Bit3 OFF

Bit4 OFF

Rev.B

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Rev.C

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Rev.D

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2)

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

For setting DIP switch SW2, all bits are set to OFF position.

O F F

C.1.2

Rev.A

C-1

C.1.3

DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board See "Table 1-2 Other version up list" in "1.5.3 Other Version Up."

C.1.4

DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board For setting DIP switch SW1, the CPU clock mounted on the MRC2 board has been set. The setting of this switch is fixed, therefore do not change it.

6 5 4 3 2 1

ON

Bit6 OFF

C-2

Bit5 OFF

Bit4 OFF

Bit3 ON

Bit2 ON

Bit1 OFF

Appendix D Menu Structure

Appendix D Menu Structure

This appendix describes the menu structure of the device. It also includes specific menus for maintenance people that they can select on the control panel.

D-1

Menu Structure This section describes how to read the menu structure using "SYSTEM - # PARA" menu on page D-14 as an example.

Menu hierarchy

# Para

Shipping default : The parameter indicated beneath the menu shows a shipping default.

# OPERATION MODE > NORMAL # ACK ON TIME (30 ns) > 80 # ACK PULSE (30 ns) > 80 # BUSY OFF TIMING > ACK RISING EDGE

Menu specialized for maintenance people : The item connected with broken lines (---) shows the menu from which only the maintenance people can enter the maintenance person mode to conduct various operations.

D-2

# SELECT SIGNAL > ON # AF SIGNAL REPORT > INPUT # TIME OUT > 30 sec

Hint:

For the information on how to select individual menus, as well as useraccessible menu functions, refer to the User's Guide.

Note:

The DSCAN format listed in the menu structure are for only customers in Japan.

Appendix D Menu Structure

SETUP MENU

Note (1) DSCAN only

ME NU # SETUP

Note (2) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only Note (3) Double or triple rolls model only Note (4) A is displayed in the case of DSCAN.

SETUP #PORTn_HPGL

#PARAMETER MODE (1) >DATA FIRST PAPER SERIES (2) >A

SETUP #PORTn_DSCAN SETUP #PORTn_TIFF #AUTO SUPPLY >CONT MODE

SETUP #PORTn_CALS SETUP #PARA_HPGL SETUP #PARA_DSCAN

#FIXSIZE MODE >FIXD SIZE

SETUP #PARA_TIFF #COPY COUNT >1

SETUP #PARA_CALS

#SUPPLY PARAM. SETUP #USB_HPGL

*DATA FIRST *PANEL FIRST *A *9" *8.5" *30 ✕ 42 *MAP *DIN *CHINA *CONT MODE *OPTIMAL MODE *ROLL 1 MODE *ROLL 2 MODE (3) *ROLL 3 MODE (3) *MANUAL FEED *FIXED SIZE (4) *EXTENSION A *REAL SCALE *1 to 99 #CENTERING >OFF #PAPER TYPE >NON-DESIGNATED

A

#SIZE MARGIN (mm) >2

*OFF *ON *NON-DESIGNATED *NORMAL PAPER *TRACING PAPER *FILM *0 to 30

D-3

Note (5) TIFF, CALS only Note (6) HP-GL only.

A #DRAWING PARAM.

#OFFSET MODE >MARGIN

#MARGIN (mm) >0 #X-OFFSET (mm) >0 #Y-OFFSET (mm) >0 #WRITE MODE >OR WRITING #MIRROR >OFF #REVERSE (5) >OFF #ERROR MEMO >ON

#SCALE MODE >MANUAL SCALE

#SCALING PARAM.

D-4

B'

*0 to 100

*-9999.99 to 9999.99 *-9999.99 to 9999.99 *OR WRITING *OVER WRITING *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *ON *SPECIAL (6) *OFF *MANUAL SCALE *REDUCE

#SCALE X (%) >100.00

*0.01 to 100.00

#SCALE Y (%) >100.00

*0.01 to 100.00

#PEN WIDTH SCALE >ON

B

*MARGIN *VARIABLE SIZE *FIXED SIZE

*ON *OFF

Appendix D Menu Structure

Note (7) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.

B

B' #A4 >A4

#FIX SCALE A

#A3 >A3

#A2 >A2

#A1 >A1

#A0 >A0

#FIX SCALE 9" (7)

#A >A

#B >B

C

C'

*A4 *A3 *A2 *A1 *A0 *A3 *A2 *A1 *A0 *A4 *A2 *A1 *A0 *A4 *A3 *A1 *A0 *A4 *A3 *A2 *A0 *A4 *A3 *A2 *A1

*A *B *C *D *E *B *C *D *E *A

C"

D-5

Note (7) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.

C

C"

C'

#C >C

#D >D

#E >E

#FIX SCALE 8.5" (7)

#A >A

#B >B

#C >C

#D >D

D

D-6

D"

*C *D *E *A *B *D *E *A *B *C *E *A *B *C *D *A *B *C *D *E *B *C *D *E *A *C *D *E *A *B *D *E *A *B *C

Appendix D Menu Structure

Note (8) HP-GL, DSCAN only

D

Note (9) HP-GL only. Note (10) When the custom (PLOT

D"

POINT) of the system custom is ON

#E >E

HP-GL only.

#FORMAT PARM. (8)

#PRT DRIVER (9) >ENABLE

#GRAPHIC LANG. (9) >AUTO

#TERMINATOR (9)

*ENABLE *DISABLE *CHINA *AUTO *HP-GL *HP-GL/2 #PG1; >ON #NR; >ON #SP0; >ON #ESC.) >ON #AF; >ON #AH; >ON #FR; >ON

#PLAN SIZE (9) >ON (PS)

#PLOT POINT (10) >ON( PS)

E

E'

*E *A *B *C *D

*ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF

*ON(PS) *ON(IP) *ON(IW) *OFF

*ON *OFF

D-7

E

E' #DRAWING (11) >NOP #PAPER NO. (11) >PAPER SOURCE

#PEN PARAMETER (12)

#PEN PAR.MODE >DATA PRIORITY

*NOP *EOP *PAPER SOURCE *PAPER TYPE *OFF *DATE PRIORITY *PANEL PRIORITY #WIDTH (mm) >n *0.00 to 16.00

#PEN0 to N (13)

#DENSITY (%) >n *0 to 100 #CORNER >ROUND #JOINT >ROUND #PEN ADJUST (mm) >-0.00 #LINE DISPOSAL >OFF #RASTER PARAM

#IMAGE SCALE >LINE DRAW.MODE #SCREENING (14) >LINE DRAW.MODE

*ROUND *BUTT *ROUND *MITERED

*-0.99 to 0.99

*OFF *ON *LINE DRAW.MODE *PICTURE MODE *LINE DRAW.MODE *GRAPHICS MODE *PICTURE MODE

Note (11) DSCAN only Note (12) HP-GL,DSCAN only Note (13) HP-GL is 0 to 15 DSCAN is 1 to 32 Note (14) HP-GL,DSCAN,TIFF only.

D-8

Appendix D Menu Structure

DEVICE MENU

MENU #DEV I CE .

#POWER SAVE EFCT *HIGH >HIGH *LOW

#POWER SAVE >15min

#EDGE CUT TIMER >OFF

#DOOR OPEN CUT >OFF #DENSITY >NORMAL

#TRACE MODE >NORMAL

#BOTTLE MAINT. >AUTO

#SPECIAL SET2 >00

#SPECIAL SET3 >OFF

*OFF *15min *30min *60min *90min *OFF *30min *1hour *2hour *4hour *1min *5min *10min *OFF *ON *THIN *RATHER THIN *NORMAL *RATHER THICK *THICK *NORMAL *WETTY

*AUTO *MANUAL

*00 to FF

*OFF *ON

D-9

MENU # PAPER .

PAPER >ROLLn

#PAPER KIND >NORMAL

#PAPER SERIES >A

D-10

*NORMAL *TRACE *FILM *A *9" *8.5" *30x42 *MAP *DIN *CHINA

Appendix D Menu Structure

FUNCTION MENU

MENU # F UNC T I ON .

#MENU PRINT >SYSTEM

#HPGL SELF PLOT >PORT1

#DSAN SELF PLOT >PORT1 #ERROR LOG >PAGE COUNT 1

*SYSTEM *PORTn *PARA *USB *ALL *PORTn *PARA *USB *PORTn *PARA *PAGE COUNT 1 *PAGE COUNT 5

#JOB LOG >PAGE COUNT 1

*PAGE COUNT 1 *PAGE COUNT 5

#ENGINE LOG >     OK? #SYSTEM DATE >aa:bb:cc #SYSTEM TIME >aa:bb:cc # FORMAT HDD >     OK? # FORMAT NVRAM >     OK? #VERSION UP >lp1010.img Note (1) #INIT CHARG.INF >     OK?

Note(1): Applicable choices vary depending on the contents of the CF card specialized for maintenance person's.

#PRINT CHARG.INF >     OK? #MAINTE INFO >FAX PRINT #DATE DUMP >     OK?

D-11

MENU # PROTOCO L .

PROTOCOL #PORT1: XPT

#PDL SELECT >HDTC #XPT PORT >9100

PROTOCOL #PORT2:LPD

#PDL SELECT >HDTC #PRINTER NAME >LP02 #PDL SELECT >HDTC

○

○

○

○

○

PROTOCOL #PORT3:FTP

PROTOCOL #PARALLEL

D-12

#USER NAME >FTP03 #PDL SELECT >HDTC

Appendix D Menu Structure

RESET MENU

ME NU #RESET .

#SYSTEM RESET >

#PORT RESET >PORT1

D-13

SYSTEM MENU MENU # S Y S T EM .

SYSTEM #COMM.PARAM

COMM.PARAM #ETHERNET COMM.PARAM #PARALLEL

H #TIMING MODE >NORMAL

*NORMAL *FAST *SLOW *MANUAL

#ACK ONTIME (30ns) >80

1 to 127

#ACK PULSE (30ns) >80

1 to 127

#BUSY OFF TIMING > ACK RISING EDGE #SELECTSIGNAL >ON

* ACK RISING EDGE * ACK RISING EDGE *ON *OFF/ON

#AF SIGNAL DIRECTION *INPUT >INPUT *OUTPUT #TIME OUT (100msec) *1 to 18000 >300 COMM.PARAM #USB #WEB LOCK >OFF SYSTEM #ENABLE SERIES

*OFF *ON #A >ON #9" >OFF #8.5" >OFF #30✕42 >OFF #MAP >OFF #DIN >OFF

D-14

F

#CHINA >ON

#TIME OUT (sec) >10 #CHANGE INTERFACE >OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF

*0 to 99

*OFF *ON

Appendix D Menu Structure

F

SYSTEM #APPLY ROLL

APPLY ROLL #A SERIES

#USE A0 >ON #USE A1 >ON #USE A2 >OFF #USE A3 >ON

APPLY ROLL #9" SERIES

#USE 36" >ON #USE 24" >OFF #USE 18" >OFF #USE 12" >OFF

APPLY ROLL #8.5" SERIES

#USE 34" >ON #USE 22" >OFF #USE 17" >OFF #USE 11" >OFF

APPLY ROLL #30✕42 SERIES

G

#USE 30" >ON

*ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF

G'

D-15

G

G'

APPLY ROLL #MAP SERIES

#USE B1-MAP >ON #USE B2-MAP >OFF

APPLY ROLL #DIN SERIES

#USE B1-DIN >ON #USE B2-DIN >OFF

APPLY ROLL #CHINA SERIES

#USE CHINA A0 >ON #USE CHINA A1 >OFF #USE CHINA A2 >OFF

SYSTEM #CHINA SIZE

#USE CHINA A3 >OFF #CHINA A0 >914mm

#CHINA A1 >620mm #CHINA A2 >450mm #CHINA A3 >310mm #INITIAL SET >STANDARD

*914mm *910mm *900mm *880mm *620mm *610mm *450mm *440mm *310mm

*STANDARD *CHINA

#FACTORY SET > OK #LANGUAGE >JAPANESE

*JAPANESE *ENGLISH

#SERIAL NUMBER >00000 to 65535 #SYSTEM CUSTOM >

D-16

CUSTOM (PLOT POINT) >OFF *OFF *ON

*ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF *ON *OFF

Appendix D Menu Structure

H

#PORT SELECT 1-10 >XLF------------

*X *L *F *-

#DHCP >DISABLE

*DISABLE *ENABLE

#IP ADDRESS >000.000.000.000

*000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255

#SUBNET MASK >000.000.000.000

*000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 #GATEWAY ADDR01 >000.000.000.000

#ROUTING TABLE

#NETWORK ADDR01 >000.000.000.000

#ROUTING TABLE2

#SETUP DETAILS

*000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 *000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 #GATEWAY ADDR02 >000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 #NETWORK ADDR02 >000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 to #GATEWAY ADDR10 *000.000.000.000 >000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 #NETWORK ADDR10 *000.000.000.000 >000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255

#METRIC >064

*1 to 255

#ETHERNET ADDR >0800832Annnn #CONNECTION SPD. >AUTO

I

*AUTO *100 *10

D-17

I #CONNECTION TYPE >AUTO *AUTO *FULL *HALF #HTTP PORT >00080 *0 to 65535 #PORT TIME OUT >30min

#FTP DATE TYPE >ASCII/BIN #SNMP >OFF #SNMP VERSION >V1

#TRAPnn

*OFF *5min *10min *15min *30min *ASCII/BIN *BIN *OFF *ON *V1 *V2 #MANEGER >000.000.000.000 #ERROR >ON #JOB >OFF

#IP ADDR >000.000.000.000 #PORT >ALL

#SNMP TRAP NUM. >2

D-18

*1 to 20

*000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 *ON *OFF *OFF *ON (IP ADDR) *ON (PORT) *000.000.000.000 to *255.255.255.255 *ALL *PORT01 to 10

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

This appendix shows electrical connection diagrams of the device.

E-1

E-2

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

Box (electric)

Male

[Symbol] Female

LVPS(PSU-LSP) : Low voltage power unit - [1/4]

Crimped terminal Flat terminal

LVPS (PSU-LSP(S) : Low voltage power unit (for HDD)

Disconnected

L1: Inductor (AC100V) Inductor (AC220/230V)

Crimped connector

SW01: Main power switch

LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 1

3.5' HDD : Option unit - [1/2]

FL02: Halogen lamp (600W)

HTR2- ASSY (side)

Electrical connection diagram

Fuser unit

FL01: Halogen lamp (600W)

HTR1- ASSY (center)

Page 1/13

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

LVPS(PSU-LSP) : Low voltage power unit - [2/4]

Box (electric)

[Symbol] Crimped connector relay Flat terminal

Male

Butt

Crimped connector

Female

Disconnected

Cutter cover open/close - [1/2]

Top cover open/close - [1/2]

INT3:Interlock SW

INT1:Interlock SW

LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 2

Electrical connection diagram

LEDH : LED head - [1/2]

Fixation door open/close - [1/2]

INT5:MS06-2

HDD cooling

BL05-3:Axis flow fan

HV-PS cooling

Cooling controller 2

BL05-2:Sirocco fan

BL05-4:Axis flow fan

Cooling controller 1 (board cover)

BL05-1:Sirocco fan

Page 2/13

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-3

E-4

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

LVPS(PSU-LSP) : Low voltage power unit - [3/4]

Box (electric)

[Symbol] Crimped connector Disconnected

Female

Crimped connector relay

Male

Crimped connector

Connector color : Yellow

FUS01:Temp. fuse

LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 3

Electrical connection diagram

PCB-ASSY-MRC2 : RIP board - [1/3]

Fuser unit

Paper feed unit

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [1/8]

Over protect

PCV-ASSY-RFU : Paper feed unit - [1/4]

PM01 : DC servo motor - [1/2]

HV-PS : High voltage power unit - [1/2]

Page 3/13

TH04: Thermistor

TH02: Thermistor

BL01: Sirocco fan

Fixation temp. (width)

Over heat protect

Suction duct

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

TH01: Thermistor

(1:VCC.3:GND)

[Symbol]

PS07: Lever type photo 2

(1:VCC.3:GND)

PS05: Lever type photo 2

(1:VCC.3:GND)

Crimped connector Drawer connector

Female

Crimped connector relay

Male

Crimped connector

INT4-5V: Drawer connector

PS06: Lever type photo 2

(3:VCC.1:GND PS15)

PS15: Reflection type photo

Fixation temp. (center)

Paper ejection (fixation)

Fuser unit

Paper top edge pass (registration)

Paper transfer (suction part)

Manual feed detection 1

Guide (insertion/lower) unit

B side connector: Yellow

Box (electric)

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 1

Electrical connection diagram

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [2/8]

Page 4/13

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-5

E-6 [Symbol]

B side connector: Yellow

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [3/8]

Box (electric)

Crimped connector relay

Crimped connector

Process cartridge

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 2

Electrical connection diagram

PCB-ASSY -PSCS : Process cartridge board

PNL : PL Control panel

Page 5/13

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [4/8]

Box (electric)

[Symbol]

B side connector: Yellow

Flat terminal Butt

Crimped connector Crimped connector relay

Male

Disconnected

Crimped connector

Female

Waste toner bottle

Manual tray open/close

Fixation door open/close - [2/2]

Cutter cover open/close - [2/2]

Top cover open/close - [2/2]

Waste toner bottle vibration

Discharge LED ON/OFF

Discharger upper right

Discharger upper center

Discharger upper left

Discharger upper (center)

Discharger upper (left)

Discharger upper (left)

MS05: Micro SW

MS07: Micro SW

INT5:MS06-1

INT3:Interlock SW

INT1:Interlock SW

BM01: DC motor

EL01: LED Alley

BL03R: Axis flow fan

BL03C: Axis flow fan

BL03L: Axis flow fan

BL02: Sirocco fan

BL06-1: Sirocco fan

BL06-2: Sirocco fan

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 3

Electrical connection diagram

Waste toner

TS02: Magnetic sensor

Page 6/13

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-7

E-8

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [5/8]

Box (electric)

[Symbol]

Crimped connector relay

Crimped connector

B side connector: Yellow

Male

Crimped connector

Female

HM01: Pulse motor

Development presence or not

Developer toner stirrer

TS01 : Reflection sensor

GM01: Pulse motor

Manual feed ON/OFF

LED head temperature

Top cover open/close (L)

CL06: Magnetic clutch

TH03 : Thermistor

MS08 : Micro SW

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 4

Electrical connection diagram

Register roller ON/OFF

CL04: Magnetic clutch

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)

Toner cartridge

Developer unit

Heat roller rotation

MS04 : Micro SW

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)

Page 7/13

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

Box (electric)

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [6/8]

[Symbol] Crimped terminal Flat terminal

Crimped connector relay

HV-PS : High voltage power unit - [2/2]

Crimped connector

B side connector: Yellow

High voltage wire : Use the UL3239 AWG#22.

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 5

Electrical connection diagram

Separator

Transfer

Paper feed unit

Process cartridge

Development

Discharge

LVPS(PSU-LSP) : Low voltage power unit - [4/4]

PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper feed board - [2/4]

PM01 : DC servo motor - [2/2]

Page 8/13

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-9

E-10 Male

[Symbol] Crimped connector

Female

PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [7/8]

Box (electric) PCB-ASSY-MRC2 : RIP board - [2/3]

Electrical connection diagram PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 6

Page 9/13

[Symbol]

Male

Crimped connector

Female

Box (electric) PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board - [8/8]

LEDH : LED head - [2/2]

Electrical connection diagram PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 7

Page 10/13

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-11

E-12 Male

[Symbol] Crimped connector

Female

PCB-ASSY-USB2 : Optional board

PCB-ASSY-MRC2 : RIP board - [3/3]

Box (electric)

3.5' HDD : Optional unit - [2/2]

PCB-ASSY-MRC2 : RIP board

Electrical connection diagram

Page 11/13

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

[Symbol]

PS30 : Lever type photo 1

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS31 : Lever type photo 1

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS32 : Lever type photo 1

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS04 : Lever type photo 1

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

Paper width (A0) detection

Paper width (A1) detection

Paper width (A2) detection

Paper width (A3) detection

CUTM : DC motor

RE02 : Micro switch

Slitter cutter left home

Cutter motor

RE01 : Micro switch

Slitter cutter right home

Box (electric)

Crimped connector relay

Crimped connector

Male

Crimped connector

Female

PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board 1

Electrical connection diagram

PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board - [3/4]

Page 12/13

Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram

E-13

E-14 [Symbol]

PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper feed unit board - [4/4]

[Note] For the harnesses for which the UL No. is not specified, use the following: ･ UL1007 (crimped connector) ･ UL1061 (crimped connector)

Paper feed unit

Crimped connector relay

Crimped connector

Male

Drawer connector

Crimped connector

Female

Roll 3 paper feed/rewind

Roll 3 presence or not

Door 3 ( bottom tray) open/close

Roll 2 paper feed/rewind

Roll 2 presence or not

Door 2 ( middle tray) open/close

Roll 1 paper feed/rewind

Roll 1 presence or not

Door 1 ( top tray) open/close

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)

TM01 : Pulse motor

PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board

Electrical connection diagram

Paper transfer on cutter

Motor side connector : 04KR-6S Relay connector : BU04P-TR-P-H

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)

FM03 : Pulse motor

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS13 : Transparent type photo

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS23 : Transparent type photo

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)

FM02 : Pulse motor

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS12 : Transparent type photo

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS22 : Transparent type photo

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)

FM01 : Pulse motor

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS11 : Transparent type photo

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

PS21 : Transparent type photo

Page 13/13